1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [  options  ...  ]  compare-
19       image [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45        GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for  creating,  com‐
46       paring,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utili‐
47       ties are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable:
48
49       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
50       play running an X server.
51
52       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
53       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
54       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
55       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
56
57       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
58       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
59       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
60       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
61       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
62       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
63
64       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
65       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
66       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
67       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
68       truth value to the executing environment.
69
70       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
71       ate new images.
72
73       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
74       guage (MSL).
75
76       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
77       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
78       number of image transformations.
79
80       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
81       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
82       ning an X server.
83
84       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
85       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
86
87       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
88       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
89       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
90
91       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
92       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
93       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
94
95       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
96       images  are  tiled  on  the  composite image with the name of the image
97       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
98
99       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
100       cution time consumed.
101
102       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
103       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
104       building the software.
105
106       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
107
108
109       Name  Mode Description
110        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
111        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
112        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
113        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
114        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
115        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
116        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
117        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
118        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
119        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
120                         interchange format
121        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
122        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
123        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
124        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
125        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
126                         Support Type 1 image
127        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
128        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
129        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
130                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
131                         the image depth)
132        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
133                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
134                         on the image depth)
135        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
136        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
137        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
138        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
139        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
140                         Medicine image
141        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
142        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
143        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
144        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
145        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
146        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
147        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
148                         Interchange format
149        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
151        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
154                         Interchange format
155        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
156                         TIFF preview
157        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
158                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
159        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
162        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
163        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
164        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
165        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
166        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
167        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
168                         (version 87a)
169        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
170                         another
171        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
172                         depending on the image depth)
173        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
174        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
175        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
176                         client-side image map
177        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
178        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
179        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
180        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
181        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
182        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
183        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
184        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
185                          statistics
186        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
187        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
188        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
189        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
190                         interchange format
191        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
194        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
195        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
196        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
197                         JFIF format
198        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
201        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
202        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
203        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
204        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
205        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
206        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
207        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
208        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
209        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
210                         -byte-first order
211        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
212        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
213        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
214        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
215        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
216        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
217        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
218        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
219        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
220        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
221        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
222        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
223        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
224        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
225        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
226        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
227        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
228        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
229        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
230        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
231        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
232        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
233        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
234        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
235        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
236        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
237        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
238        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
239        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
240        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
241        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
242        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
243                         opaque only
244        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
245                         semitransparency OK
246        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
247                         indexed, binary transparency only
248        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
249        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
250        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
251                         effect, or f/x
252        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
253        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
254        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
255        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
256        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
257        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
258        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
259        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
260        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
261        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
262        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
263        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
264        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
265        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
266        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
267        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
268                         client-side image map
269        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
270        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
271        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
272        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
273        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
274        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
275        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
276        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
277        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
278        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
279        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
280        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
281        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
282        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
283        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
284        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
285        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
286        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
287        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
288        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
289        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
290        o  X         rw- X Image
291        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
292        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
293                         and white)
294        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
295        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
296        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
297        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
298        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
299        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
300        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
301
302           Modes:
303                     r   Read
304                     w   Write
305                     +   Multi-image
306
307
308       Support  for  some  of  these  formats  require  additional programs or
309       libraries.  See README in the source package for where to find optional
310       additional software.
311
312       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
313       specified, frames are combined into  a  single  multi-image  file.  Use
314       +adjoin if you want a single image produced for each frame.
315
316       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
317       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
318       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
319
320       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
321       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
322       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
323       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
324       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
325       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
326

FILES AND FORMATS

328       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
329       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
330       precede  the  filename  with  an  image  format  name   and   a   colon
331       (i.e.ps:image)  or  specify  the  image  type  as  the  filename suffix
332       (i.e.image.ps).  The magic number takes precedence  over  the  filename
333       suffix  and  the  prefix takes precedence over the magic number and the
334       suffix in input files.  When a file is read, its magic number is stored
335       in  the  "image->magick"  string.   In  output  files, the prefix takes
336       precedence over the filename suffix,  and  the  filename  suffix  takes
337       precedence over the "image->magick" string.
338
339       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
340       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
341       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
342       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
343       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
344
345
346       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
347       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
348       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
349       window.
350
351       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
352       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
353       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
354       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
355       or gzip respectively.
356
357       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
358       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
359       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
360       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
361       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
362       try  (e.g.  -size  640x512  "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").   Surround the
363       image name with quotation marks to prevent your shell from interpreting
364       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
365       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
366       ument  with  +adjoin  specified)  may  be written with the scene number
367       included as part of the filename. In order to include the scene  number
368       in  the  filename,  it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format
369       specification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
370
371           image%02d.miff
372
373
374       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
375       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
376       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
377       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
378       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
379
380       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
381       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
382       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
383       command line.
384

OPTIONS

386       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
387       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
388       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
389       Some options only affect the decoding of images  and  others  only  the
390       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
391
392       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
393       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
394       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
395
396
397       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
398       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
399       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
400
401
402       -adjoin
403              join images into a single multi-image file
404
405              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
406              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
407              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
408              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
409              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
410              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
411              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
412              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
413
414                  image%02d.miff
415
416
417       -affine <matrix>
418              drawing transform matrix
419
420              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
421              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
422
423       -antialias
424              remove pixel aliasing
425
426              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
427              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
428              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
429              rithms.  Reasons  to  disable  antialiasing   include   avoiding
430              increasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
431
432       -append
433              append a set of images
434
435              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
436              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
437              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
438              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
439              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
440              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
441              images are appended.
442
443        -asc-cdl <spec>
444              apply ASC CDL color transform
445
446              Applies  ("bakes  in")  the  ASC  CDL, which is a format for the
447              exchange of basic  primary  color  grading  information  between
448              equipment  and software from different manufacturers. The format
449              defines the math for three functions: slope, offset  and  power.
450              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
451              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
452              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
453              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
454
455              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
456              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
457
458                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
459                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
460                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
461                  saturation
462
463
464              with the unity (no change) specification being:
465
466                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
467
468
469       -authenticate <string>
470              decrypt image with this password
471
472              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
473              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
474              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
475              not supported.
476
477       -auto-orient
478              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
479
480              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
481              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
482              plied by the -orient option.
483
484       -average
485              average a set of images
486
487              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
488              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
489              all images are averaged.
490
491       -backdrop
492              display the image centered on a backdrop.
493
494              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
495              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
496              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
497              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
498
499       -background <color>
500              the background color
501
502              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
503              -fill option.
504
505       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
506              pixels below the threshold become black
507
508              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
509              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
510              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
511              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
512              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
513              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
514              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
515              a  channel  later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%) symbol is
516              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
517              range.
518
519       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
520              blue chromaticity primary point
521
522       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
523              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
524
525              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
526
527       -border <width>x<height>
528              surround the image with a border of color
529
530              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
531
532       -bordercolor <color>
533              the border color
534
535              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
536              -fill option.
537
538       -borderwidth <geometry>
539              the border width
540
541       -box <color>
542              set the color of the annotation bounding box
543
544              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
545              -fill option.
546
547              See -draw for further details.
548
549       -channel <type>
550              the type of channel
551
552              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
553              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
554
555              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
556              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
557              ues from an image.
558
559       -charcoal <factor>
560              simulate a charcoal drawing
561
562       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
563              remove pixels from the interior of an image
564
565              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
566              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
567              column and topmost row to remove.
568
569              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
570              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
571              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
572              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
573              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
574              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
575              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
576              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
577
578              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
579              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
580
581       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
582
583              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
584              operations.
585
586              For example, if you type the following command:
587
588                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
589
590
591              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
592
593              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
594              is not present, the option is ignored.
595
596       -coalesce
597              merge a sequence of images
598
599              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
600              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
601
602              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
603              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
604              all images are coalesced.
605
606       -colorize <value>
607              colorize the image with the pen color
608
609              Specify  the  amount  of  colorization  as a percentage. You can
610              apply separate colorization values to the red, green,  and  blue
611              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
612              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
613
614              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
615              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
616
617                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
618                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
619
620
621       -colormap <type>
622              define the colormap type
623
624              Choose between shared or private.
625
626              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
627              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
628              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
629              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
630              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
631              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
632              defined.  However,  other  clients  may  go technicolor when the
633              image colormap is installed.
634
635       -colors <value>
636              preferred number of colors in the image
637
638              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
639              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
640              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
641              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
642              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
643              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
644              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
645              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
646              more details.
647
648              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
649              color reduction algorithm.
650
651       -colorspace <value>
652              the type of colorspace
653
654              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
655              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
656              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
657
658              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
659              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
660              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
661              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
662              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
663              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
664              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
665              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
666              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
667              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
668              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
669              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
670              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
671
672              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
673              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
674              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
675              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
676              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
677              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
678
679
680              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
681              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
682
683              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
684              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
685              take effect.
686
687       -comment <string>
688              annotate an image with a comment
689
690              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
691              writing to an image  format  that  supports  comments.  You  can
692              include  the image filename, type, width, height, or other image
693              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
694              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
695              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
696              lar  mechanism.   If  you  want the comment to be visible on the
697              image itself, use the -draw option instead.
698
699              For example,
700
701                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
702
703
704              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
705              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
706
707              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
708              from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
709
710              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
711              comment is stored.
712
713              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
714              with the keyword "comment".
715
716       -compose <operator>
717              the type of image composition
718
719              The description of  composition  uses  abstract  terminology  in
720              order  to  allow  the  the  description  to be more clear, while
721              avoiding constant values which  are  specific  to  a  particular
722              build  configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red,
723              green, and blue levels (which  are  equal  for  a  gray  pixel).
724              MaxRGB  is the maximum integral value which may be stored in the
725              red, green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel  may
726              also  optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an
727              associated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transpar‐
728              ent),  which may be used to determine the influence of the pixel
729              color when compositing the pixel with another  image  pixel.  If
730              the  image  matte  channel  is  disabled, then all pixels in the
731              image are treated as opaque.  The color of an  opaque  pixel  is
732              fully  visible  while  the color of a transparent pixel color is
733              entirely absent (pixel color is ignored).
734
735              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
736              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
737              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
738              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
739              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
740              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
741              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
742              opaque and transparent in order to provide antialiasing (visual‐
743              ly smooth edges). The description of the  composition  operators
744              use  this concept of image "shape" in order to make the descrip‐
745              tion of the operators easier to understand. While it  is  conve‐
746              nient to describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they are by
747              no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are  based
748              on  continuous  floating-point  mathematics  rather  than simple
749              boolean operations.
750
751              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
752              composite operators are available:
753
754                   Over
755                   In
756                   Out
757                   Atop
758                   Xor
759                   Plus
760                   Minus
761                   Add
762                   Subtract
763                   Difference
764                   Divide
765                   Multiply
766                   Bumpmap
767                   Copy
768                   CopyRed
769                   CopyGreen
770                   CopyBlue
771                   CopyOpacity
772                   CopyCyan
773                   CopyMagenta
774                   CopyYellow
775                   CopyBlack
776
777
778              The behavior of each operator is described below.
779
780
781               Over
782
783                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
784                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
785                    region of overlap.
786
787               In
788
789                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
790                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
791                    in the result.
792
793               Out
794
795                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
796                    base-image cut out.
797
798               Atop
799
800                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
801                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
802                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
803                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
804                    result.
805
806               Xor
807
808                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
809                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
810                    region will be blank.
811
812               Plus
813
814                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
815                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
816                    independent of the matte channels.
817
818               Minus
819
820                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
821                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
822                    opaque, full coverage).
823
824               Add
825
826                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
827                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
828
829               Subtract
830
831                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
832                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
833                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
834
835               Difference
836
837                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
838                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
839
840               Divide
841
842                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
843                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
844                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
845                    image as base-image).
846
847               Multiply
848
849                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
850                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
851
852               Bumpmap
853
854                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
855
856               Copy
857
858                    The resulting image is base-image  replaced  with  change-
859                    image. Here the matte information is ignored.
860
861               CopyRed
862
863                    The  resulting  image  is  the  red  channel in base-image
864                    replaced with the red channel in change-image.  The  other
865                    channels are copied untouched.
866
867               CopyGreen
868
869                    The  resulting  image  is  the green channel in base-image
870                    replaced with the green channel in change-image. The other
871                    channels are copied untouched.
872
873               CopyBlue
874
875                    The  resulting  image  is  the  blue channel in base-image
876                    replaced with the blue channel in change-image. The  other
877                    channels are copied untouched.
878
879               CopyOpacity
880
881                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
882                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
883                    other channels are copied untouched.
884
885               CopyCyan
886
887                    The  resulting  image  is  the  cyan channel in base-image
888                    replaced with the cyan channel in change-image. The  other
889                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
890                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
891
892               CopyMagenta
893
894                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
895                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
896                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
897                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
898
899               CopyYellow
900
901                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
902                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
903                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
904                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
905
906               CopyBlack
907
908                    The resulting image is the  black  channel  in  base-image
909                    replaced with the black channel in change-image. The other
910                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
911                    requires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A) colorspace. If
912                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
913                    pixel intensities are used.
914
915
916
917
918       -compress <type>
919              the type of image compression
920
921              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
922              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
923              ZSTD.
924
925
926              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
927              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
928              image file.
929
930              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
931              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
932              JPEG is generally not recommended.
933
934              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
935              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
936              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
937              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
938              the chroma channels.
939
940       -contrast
941              enhance or reduce the image contrast
942
943              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
944              lighter and darker elements  of  the  image.  Use  -contrast  to
945              enhance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
946
947
948              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
949
950                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
951
952
953       -convolve <kernel>
954              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
955
956              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
957              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
958              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
959              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
960
961       -create-directories
962              create output directory if required
963
964              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
965              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
966              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
967              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
968
969       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
970              preferred size and location of the cropped image
971
972              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
973
974              The  width  and  height  give the size of the image that remains
975              after cropping, and x and y are offsets that give  the  location
976              of  the top left corner of the cropped image with respect to the
977              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
978              instead.
979
980              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
981              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
982              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
983              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
984              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
985              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
986              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
987              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
988              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
989              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
990
991              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
992              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
993              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
994              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
995              image.
996
997       -cycle <amount>
998              displace image colormap by amount
999
1000              Amount defines the  number  of  positions  each  colormap  entry
1001              isshifted.
1002
1003
1004       -debug <events>
1005              enable debug printout
1006
1007              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1008              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1009              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1010              Coder, Configure,  Deprecate,  Error,  Exception,  Locale,  Ren‐
1011              der,Resource,  TemporaryFile,  Transform, Warning, X11, or User.
1012              For example, to log cache and blob events, use
1013
1014                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1015
1016
1017              The "User" domain is normally  empty,  but  developers  can  log
1018              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1019
1020              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1021
1022              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1023
1024              An  alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1025              ronment variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1026              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1027
1028       -deconstruct
1029              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1030
1031              This  option compares each image with the next in a sequence and
1032              returns the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences  it
1033              discovers.   This  method can undo a coalesced sequence returned
1034              by the -coalesce option, and is useful  for  removing  redundant
1035              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1036
1037              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
1038              option.  If the -deconstruct option appears  after  all  of  the
1039              input images, all images are deconstructed.
1040
1041       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1042              add  coder/decoder  specific  options This option creates one or
1043              more definitions for coders and decoders to  use  while  reading
1044              and  writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders and
1045              decoders to control options that are specific to  certain  image
1046              formats.  If  value is missing for a definition, an empty-valued
1047              definition of a flag will be created with  that  name.  This  is
1048              used  to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to remove
1049              definitions previously created. Use +define "*"  to  remove  all
1050              existing definitions.
1051
1052              The following definitions may be created:
1053
1054
1055               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1056
1057                    Use  the  cineon:colorspace  option  when reading a Cineon
1058                    file to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses.  This
1059                    overrides  the  colorspace  type implied by the DPX header
1060                    (if any).
1061
1062               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1063
1064                    If the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined,  GraphicsMagick
1065                    will  write DPX images with the specified bits per sample,
1066                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1067                    specified,  then  the value is based on the existing image
1068                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1069                    supports  bits  per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12, and 16.
1070                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1071                    A padding (see below).
1072
1073               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1074
1075                    Use  the  dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX file to
1076                    specify the colorspace the DPX file uses.  This  overrides
1077                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1078
1079               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1080
1081                    DPX  samples  are  output within 32-bit words. They may be
1082                    tightly packed end-to-end  within  the  words  ("packed"),
1083                    padded  with  null bits to the right of the sample ("a" or
1084                    "lsbpad"), or padded with null bits to  the  left  of  the
1085                    sample  ("b"  or "msbpad"). This option only has an effect
1086                    for sample sizes of 10 or 12  bits.  If  samples  are  not
1087                    packed,  the  DPX standard recommends type A padding. Many
1088                    DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits  with  type  A
1089                    padding.
1090
1091               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1092
1093                    Allows  the user to specify the endian order of the pixels
1094                    when reading or writing the DPX files. Sometimes  this  is
1095                    useful  if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly so
1096                    that the file header and the pixels use different  endian‐
1097                    ness.
1098
1099               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1100
1101                    GraphicsMagick  strives  to adhere to the DPX standard but
1102                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1103                    a  result,  some 10-bit DPX files have Red and Blue inter‐
1104                    changed, or Cb and Cr interchanged  due  to  an  different
1105                    interpretation  of  the  standard,  or  getting  the wires
1106                    crossed. The swap-samples  option  may  be  supplied  when
1107                    reading  or  writing  in  order to read or write using the
1108                    necessary sample order.
1109
1110               jp2:rate=<value>
1111
1112                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1113                    JPEG-2000  files. The compression factor is the reciprocal
1114                    of the compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0  to  1.0,
1115                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1116                    value overrides the -quality setting. The default  quality
1117                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1118
1119               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1120
1121                    Enables  or  disables  block smoothing when reading a JPEG
1122                    file (default enabled).
1123
1124               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1125
1126                    Selects the IJG JPEG library DCT  implementation  to  use.
1127                    The  encoding  implementations  vary in speed and encoding
1128                    error. The available choices for value are  islow,  ifast,
1129                    float,  default  and  fastest. Note that fastest might not
1130                    necessarily be fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending  on  the
1131                    choices  made when the JPEG library was built and how your
1132                    CPU behaves.
1133
1134               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1135
1136                    Enables or disables fancy upsampling when reading  a  JPEG
1137                    file (default enabled).
1138
1139               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1140
1141                    Specifies  an integer value for the maximum number of pro‐
1142                    gressive scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default  maxi‐
1143                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1144                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1145                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1146
1147               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1148
1149                    Specifies  an  integer  value  for  how  many warnings are
1150                    allowed for any given error type before being promoted  to
1151                    a  hard  error.   JPEG  files producing excessive warnings
1152                    indicate a problem with the file.
1153
1154               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1155
1156                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1157                    ing  is  enabled  by default, but may be disabled for very
1158                    large images since it encoding requires  that  the  entire
1159                    image  be  buffered  in  memory. Huffman encoding produces
1160                    smaller JPEG files at the  expense  of  added  compression
1161                    time and memory consumption.
1162
1163               jpeg:preserve-settings
1164
1165                    If  the  jpeg:preserve-settings  flag is defined, the JPEG
1166                    encoder will use the same "quality" and  "sampling-factor"
1167                    settings  that  were found in the input file, if the input
1168                    was in JPEG format. These settings are also  preserved  if
1169                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1170                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1171                    input  file, the quality setting is preserved but the sam‐
1172                    pling-factors are not.
1173
1174               pcl:fit-to-page
1175
1176                    If the pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then  the  printer
1177                    is  requested  to  scale  the  image  to fit the page size
1178                    (width and/or height).
1179               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1180
1181                    mng:maximum-loops specifies the maximum  number  of  loops
1182                    allowed  to  be  specified by a MNG LOOP chunk. Without an
1183                    imposed limit, a MNG file could request up  to  2147483647
1184                    loops,  which could run for a very long time.  The current
1185                    default limit is 512 loops.
1186
1187               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1188
1189                    If the pdf:use-cropbox flag is set to  true,  then  Ghost‐
1190                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1191
1192               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1193
1194                    If  the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1195                    script is requested to stop processing the  PDF  when  the
1196                    first  error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt to
1197                    process all requested pages.
1198
1199               ps:imagemask
1200
1201                    If the ps:imagemask flag is  defined,  the  PS3  and  EPS3
1202                    coders  will  create  Postscript files that render bilevel
1203                    images with the Postscript imagemask operator  instead  of
1204                    the image operator.
1205
1206               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1207
1208                    If  the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1209                    ick will use it to determine the  minimum  frame  size  to
1210                    output  when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file con‐
1211                    taining a succession of  reduced  versions  of  the  first
1212                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1213
1214               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1215
1216                    Specify  the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or writ‐
1217                    ing TIFF files, overriding the normal value.  The  default
1218                    alpha  channel  type  for  new files is unspecified alpha.
1219                    Existing alpha settings are preserved when converting from
1220                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1221                    alpha, the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e.  altered)
1222                    with  the  alpha  channel.  Files  with "associated" alpha
1223                    appear as if they were alpha composited on a  black  back‐
1224                    ground  when the matte channel is disabled. If the unasso‐
1225                    ciated alpha type is selected, then the alpha  channel  is
1226                    saved  without  altering  the pixels. Photoshop recognizes
1227                    associated alpha as transparency information, if the  file
1228                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1229                    loaded as an independent  channel.   Note  that  for  many
1230                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1231                    using associated alpha, without  properly  pre-multiplying
1232                    the pixels.
1233
1234               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1235
1236                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1237                    use it to determine the bit fill order used while  writing
1238                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1239                    the native bit order of all modern CPUs. The  only  excep‐
1240                    tion  to  this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX compression is
1241                    requested since FAX machines  send  data  in  bit-reversed
1242                    order  and  therefore  RFC  2301  recommends using reverse
1243                    order.
1244
1245               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1246
1247                    If the tiff:group-three-options key is defined,  Graphics‐
1248                    Magick  will  use  it  to  set the group3 options tag when
1249                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1250                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1251                    4.
1252
1253               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1254
1255                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1256                    a  list  of  comma-delimited  integer  TIFF  tag values to
1257                    ignore while reading the TIFF file.   This  is  useful  in
1258                    order  to be able to read files which which otherwise fail
1259                    to read due to problems with TIFF tags.   Note  that  some
1260                    TIFF  tags  are  required  in order to be able to read the
1261                    image data at all.
1262
1263               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1264
1265                    If the tiff:report-warnings key  is  defined  and  set  to
1266                    true,  then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning excep‐
1267                    tion rather than as a coder log  message.   Such  warnings
1268                    are  reported  after  the  image has been read or written.
1269                    Most TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may  help
1270                    deduce  problems  with  the TIFF file, or help detect that
1271                    the TIFF file requires a special application to read  suc‐
1272                    cessfully  due  to  the  use of proprietary or specialized
1273                    extensions.
1274
1275               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1276
1277                    If the tiff:sample-format key is  defined,  GraphicsMagick
1278                    will  use  it  to  determine  the sample format used while
1279                    writing TIFF files. The  default  is  "unsigned".  Specify
1280                    "ieeefp"  in order to write floating-point TIFF files with
1281                    float  (32-bit)  or  double  (64-bit)  values.   Use   the
1282                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1283                    floating-point value to use.
1284
1285               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1286
1287                    If the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1288                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the maximum floating
1289                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1290                    TIFFs.  Otherwise  the  maximum  value is 1.0 or the value
1291                    obtained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag (if present).
1292                    The  floating  point  data  is  currently  not  scanned in
1293                    advance to determine a best maximum sample value so if the
1294                    range  is  not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag is not
1295                    present, it may be necessary to (intelligently)  use  this
1296                    parameter to properly read a file.
1297
1298               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1299
1300                    If  the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1301                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  minimum  floating
1302                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1303                    TIFFs. Otherwise the minimum value is  0.0  or  the  value
1304                    obtained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1305
1306               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1307
1308                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1309                    will write images with  the  specified  bits  per  sample,
1310                    overriding  any  existing depth value. Value may be any in
1311                    the range of 1 to 32, or 64 when  the  default  ´unsigned'
1312                    format  is  written,  or  16/32/24/64  if IEEEFP format is
1313                    written.  Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0  specifi‐
1314                    cation  only  requires readers to handle certain powers of
1315                    two, and the values to be handled depend on the nature  of
1316                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1317
1318               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1319
1320                    If  the  tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to a value,
1321                    the TIFF coder will write TIFF  images  with  the  defined
1322                    samples  per  pixel,  overriding  any  value stored in the
1323                    image. This option should not normally be used.
1324
1325               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1326
1327                    Allows the user to specify the number  of  rows  per  TIFF
1328                    strip.   Rounded  up  to  a multiple of 16 when using JPEG
1329                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1330
1331               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1332
1333                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1334                    This  is  normally  the default when group3 or group4 com‐
1335                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1336                    a  single strip for large images may result in failure due
1337                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1338
1339               tiff:tile
1340
1341                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1342                    default  tile  size.  Tiled TIFF organizes the image as an
1343                    array of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable  random
1344                    access.
1345
1346               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1347
1348                    Specify  the  tile  size  to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1349                    Width and height should be a multiple of 16. If the  value
1350                    is  not  a  multiple  of 16, then it will be rounded down.
1351                    Enables tiled TIFF if it has  not  already  been  enabled.
1352                    GraphicsMagick  does  not  use tiled storage internally so
1353                    tiles need to be converted back and forth from the  inter‐
1354                    nal  scanline-oriented  storage  to tile-oriented storage.
1355                    Testing with typical RGB images shows that  useful  square
1356                    tile  size  values  range from 128x128 to 1024x1024. Large
1357                    images which require using a disk-based pixel cache  bene‐
1358                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1359                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1360
1361               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1362
1363                    Specify the tile width to use while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1364                    The  tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1365                    Width should be a multiple of 16. If the value  is  not  a
1366                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1367                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1368
1369               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1370
1371                    Specify the tile height to use while writing  tiled  TIFF.
1372                    The  tile  width is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1373                    Height should be a multiple of 16. If the value is  not  a
1374                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1375                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1376
1377               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1378
1379                    Specify a value of TRUE  to  enable  lossless  mode  while
1380                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1381                    option may also be used.  The quality factor  set  by  the
1382                    -quality  option  may  be  used  to influence the level of
1383                    effort expended while compressing.
1384
1385               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1386
1387                    Specify the compression level to use while  writing  Zstd-
1388                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1389                    define is not specified, then the 'quality' value is  used
1390                    such  that the default quality setting of 75 is translated
1391                    to a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a  useful
1392                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1393
1394               webp:lossless={true|false}
1395
1396                    Enable lossless encoding.
1397
1398               webp:method={0-6}
1399
1400                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1401
1402               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1403
1404                    Hint for image type.
1405
1406               webp:target-size=<integer>
1407
1408                    Target size in bytes.
1409
1410               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1411
1412                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1413
1414               webp:segments={1-4}
1415
1416                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1417
1418               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1419
1420                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1421
1422               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1423
1424                    Filter strength.
1425
1426               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1427
1428                    Filter sharpness.
1429
1430               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1431
1432                    Filtering  type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if fil‐
1433                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1434
1435               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1436
1437                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1438
1439               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1440
1441                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1442                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1443
1444               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1445
1446                    Predictive  filtering  method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1:
1447                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1448
1449               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1450
1451                    Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless).  Default  is
1452                    100.
1453
1454               webp:pass=[1..10]
1455
1456                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1457
1458               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1459
1460                    Export  the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering is
1461                    not applied.
1462
1463               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1464
1465                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1466
1467               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1468
1469                    log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is  0
1470                    for easier progressive decoding.
1471
1472               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1473
1474                    Quality  degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on pre‐
1475                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1476                    sible degradation).
1477
1478               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1479
1480                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1481                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1482                    erally,  the  output size will be similar but the degrada‐
1483                    tion will be lower.
1484
1485               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1486
1487                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1488
1489               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1490
1491                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496               For example, to create a postscript file that will render  only
1497               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1498
1499                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1500
1501
1502       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1503              display the next image after pausing
1504
1505              This  option  is  useful  for  regulating the animation of image
1506              sequences Delay/100 seconds must expire before  the  display  of
1507              the  next image. The default is no delay between each showing of
1508              the image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1509
1510              You can specify a delay range (e.g. -delay  10-500)  which  sets
1511              the minimum and maximum delay.
1512
1513       -density <width>x<height>
1514              horizontal  and  vertical resolution in pixels of the image This
1515              option specifies the image resolution to store while encoding  a
1516              raster  image or the canvas resolution while rendering (reading)
1517              vector formats such as Postscript, PDF,  WMF,  and  SVG  into  a
1518              raster  image.  Image resolution provides the unit of measure to
1519              apply when rendering to an output device or  raster  image.  The
1520              default  unit  of  measure is in dots per inch (DPI). The -units
1521              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1522               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1523              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1524              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1525              typically  support  150,  300,  600,  or  1200 dots per inch. To
1526              determine the resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1527              the  width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number of
1528              horizontal pixels (1024 on a 1024x768  display).   If  the  file
1529              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1530              image resolution. Note that Photoshop stores and  obtains  image
1531              resolution  from a proprietary embedded profile. If this profile
1532              is not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue  to
1533              treat  the image using its former resolution, ignoring the image
1534              resolution specified in the standard file header.   The  density
1535              option  is an attribute and does not alter the underlying raster
1536              image. It may be used to adjust the rendered  size  for  desktop
1537              publishing  purposes  by adjusting the scale applied to the pix‐
1538              els. To resize the image so that it is the same size at  a  dif‐
1539              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1540
1541       -depth <value>
1542              depth of the image
1543
1544              This  is  the  number of bits of color to preserve in the image.
1545              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1546              ified,  although  8  or  16 are the most common values. Use this
1547              option to specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1548              such  as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any image
1549              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1550              els  immediately  so it may be used as a form of simple compres‐
1551              sion by discarding the  least  significant  bits.  Reducing  the
1552              depth  in advance may speed up color quantization, and help cre‐
1553              ate smaller file sizes when using a compression  algorithm  like
1554              LZW or ZIP.
1555
1556       -descend
1557              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1558
1559       -despeckle
1560              reduce the speckles within an image
1561
1562       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1563              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1564
1565              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1566              Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum  positive  dis‐
1567              placement.   White is a maximum negative displacement and middle
1568              gray is neutral.  The displacement is scaled  to  determine  the
1569              pixel  shift.   By default, the displacement applies in both the
1570              horizontal and vertical directions.   However,  if  you  specify
1571              mask,  composite image is the horizontal X displacement and mask
1572              the vertical Y displacement.
1573
1574       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1575              specifies the X server to contact
1576
1577              This option is used with convert for  obtaining  image  or  font
1578              from this X server.  See X(1).
1579
1580       -dispose <method>
1581              GIF disposal method
1582
1583              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1584              be treated after being displayed.
1585
1586              Here are the valid methods:
1587
1588                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1589                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1590                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1591                                  the background color.
1592                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1593                                  what was there prior to rendering
1594                                  the image.
1595
1596
1597       -dissolve <percent>
1598              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1599
1600              The opacity of the composite image is multiplied  by  the  given
1601              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1602
1603       -dither
1604              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1605
1606              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1607              for spatial resolution by averaging the intensities  of  several
1608              neighboring  pixels.  Images which suffer from severe contouring
1609              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1610
1611              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1612              take effect.
1613
1614              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1615              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1616              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1617
1618       -draw <string>
1619              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1620
1621              Use  this  option  to annotate an image with one or more graphic
1622              primitives.  The primitives include  shapes,  text,  transforma‐
1623              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1624
1625                   point           x,y
1626                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1627                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1628                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1629                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1630                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1631                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1632                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1633                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1634                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1635                   path            path specification
1636                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1637
1638
1639              The text primitive is
1640
1641                   text            x0,y0 string
1642
1643
1644              The text gravity primitive is
1645
1646                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1647                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1648
1649
1650              The  text  gravity  primitive only affects the placement of text
1651              and does not interact with the other primitives.  It is  equiva‐
1652              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1653              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1654
1655              The transformation primitives are
1656
1657                   rotate          degrees
1658                   translate       dx,dy
1659                   scale           sx,sy
1660                   skewX           degrees
1661                   skewY           degrees
1662
1663
1664              The pixel operation primitives are
1665
1666                   color           x0,y0 method
1667                   matte           x0,y0 method
1668
1669
1670              The shape primitives are drawn in the  color  specified  in  the
1671              preceding  -stroke  option. Except for the line and point primi‐
1672              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1673              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1674
1675              Point requires a single coordinate.
1676
1677              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1678
1679              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1680
1681              RoundRectangle  has  the  upper left and lower right coordinates
1682              and the width and height of the corners.
1683
1684              Circle has a center coordinate and a coordinate  for  the  outer
1685              edge.
1686
1687              Use  Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.  Arcs
1688              require a start and end point as well as the degree of  rotation
1689              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1690
1691              Use  Ellipse  to  draw  a  partial ellipse centered at the given
1692              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1693              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1694
1695              Finally,  polyline and polygon require three or more coordinates
1696              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1697              an  optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered at
1698              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1699
1700                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1701
1702
1703              Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of  an  object  which  is
1704              defined  in  terms  of  moveto (set a new current point), lineto
1705              (draw a straight line), curveto (draw  a  curve  using  a  cubic
1706              Bezier),  arc  (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close
1707              the current shape by drawing a line to  the  last  moveto)  ele‐
1708              ments. Compound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each consist‐
1709              ing of a single moveto followed by one or  more  line  or  curve
1710              operations)  are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes"
1711              in objects.
1712
1713              Use image to composite an image with another image.  Follow  the
1714              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1715              size, and filename:
1716
1717                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1718
1719
1720              You can use 0,0 for the image  size,  which  means  to  use  the
1721              actual  dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will
1722              be scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a  descrip‐
1723              tion of the composite operators.
1724
1725              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1726              nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces,  enclose
1727              it  in  single  or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1728              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1729              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1730
1731              For example,
1732
1733
1734                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1735
1736
1737              annotates  the  image  with  MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
1738              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1739
1740              If the first character of string is @, the text is read  from  a
1741              file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
1742
1743              Rotate  rotates  subsequent shape primitives and text primitives
1744              about the origin of the main image. If the -region  option  pre‐
1745              cedes  the  -draw  option, the origin for transformations is the
1746              upper left corner of the region.
1747
1748              Translate translates them.
1749
1750              Scale scales them.
1751
1752              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of the main
1753              image or the region.
1754
1755              The  transformations  modify the current affine matrix, which is
1756              initialized from  the  initial  affine  matrix  defined  by  the
1757              -affine option.  Transformations are cumulative within the -draw
1758              option.  The initial affine matrix is not affected; that  matrix
1759              is only changed by the appearance of another -affine option.  If
1760              another -draw option  appears,  the  current  affine  matrix  is
1761              reinitialized from the initial affine matrix.
1762
1763              Use  color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1764              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate with a method:
1765
1766                   point
1767                   replace
1768                   floodfill
1769                   filltoborder
1770                   reset
1771
1772
1773              Consider the target pixel as that specified by your  coordinate.
1774              The  point  method recolors the target pixel. The replace method
1775              recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  target  pixel.
1776              Floodfill  recolors any pixel that matches the color of the tar‐
1777              get pixel and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder  recolors  any
1778              neighbor  pixel  that  is  not  the border color. Finally, reset
1779              recolors all pixels.
1780
1781              Use matte to the change the pixel matte  value  to  transparent.
1782              Follow  the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color primi‐
1783              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1784              matte  value of the target pixel. The replace method changes the
1785              matte value of any pixel that matches the color  of  the  target
1786              pixel.  Floodfill  changes  the  matte  value  of any pixel that
1787              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1788              filltoborder  changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that
1789              is not the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally  reset  changes
1790              the matte value of all pixels.
1791
1792              You  can  set  the  primitive color, font, and font bounding box
1793              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1794              cessed  in  command  line  order so be sure to use these options
1795              before the -draw option.
1796
1797       -edge <radius>
1798              detect edges within an image
1799
1800       -emboss <radius>
1801              emboss an image
1802
1803       -encoding <type>
1804              specify the text encoding
1805
1806              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1807              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1808
1809       -endian <type>
1810              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1811
1812              MSB  indicates  big-endian  (e.g. SPARC, Motorola 68K) while LSB
1813              indicates little-endian (e.g. Intel 'x86,  VAX)  byte  ordering.
1814              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1815              This option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY,  RGB,
1816              and TIFF, formats.
1817
1818              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1819
1820       -enhance
1821              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1822
1823       -equalize
1824              perform histogram equalization to the image
1825
1826       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1827              composite image on background color canvas image
1828
1829              This  option  composites  the  image  on  a new background color
1830              (-background) canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The  exist‐
1831              ing  image  content  is  composited at the position specified by
1832              geometry x and y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity)  using
1833              the  current  image  compose  (-compose)  method.  Image content
1834              which falls outside the bounds of the new  image  dimensions  is
1835              discarded.
1836
1837              For  example,  this command creates a thumbnail of an image, and
1838              centers it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the  canvas
1839              ten  pixels  to the left and five pixels up, with respect to the
1840              thumbnail:
1841
1842                  gm convert  infile.jpg  -thumbnail  120x80  -background  red
1843              -gravity center \
1844                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1845
1846
1847              This  command  reduces  or  expands  a  JPEG  image to fit on an
1848              800x600 display:
1849
1850                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1851                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1852                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1853                            -extent 800x600 \
1854                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1855
1856
1857              If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly  4:3,  then
1858              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1859
1860       -file <filename>
1861              write annotated difference image to file
1862
1863              If  -file  is  specified,  then an annotated difference image is
1864              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1865              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1866              in the compare image so that  the  changed  pixels  become  more
1867              obvious.   Some  images  may require use of an alternative high‐
1868              light style  (see  -highlight-style)  or  highlight  color  (see
1869              -highlight-color) before the changes are obvious.
1870
1871       -fill <color>
1872              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1873
1874              Colors  are  represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1875              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1876
1877                  name               (named color)
1878                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1879                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1880                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1881                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1882                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1883                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1884                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1885                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1886                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1887                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1888
1889
1890              Enclose the color specification in quotation  marks  to  prevent
1891              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1892
1893              For example,
1894
1895                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1896                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1897                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1898
1899
1900              The  shorter  forms  are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1901              For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff  are  all  equiva‐
1902              lent.
1903
1904              See -draw for further details.
1905
1906       -filter <type>
1907              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1908
1909              Use  this  option  to  affect the resizing operation of an image
1910              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1911              mate increasing CPU time):
1912
1913                   Point
1914                   Box
1915                   Triangle
1916                   Hermite
1917                   Hanning
1918                   Hamming
1919                   Blackman
1920                   Gaussian
1921                   Quadratic
1922                   Cubic
1923                   Catrom
1924                   Mitchell
1925                   Lanczos
1926                   Bessel
1927                   Sinc
1928
1929
1930              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1931              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1932              Mitchell  filter  is  used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1933              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1934              zos filter is used.
1935
1936       -flatten
1937              flatten a sequence of images
1938
1939              In  some  file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1940              be represented by "layers" (independent images)  which  must  be
1941              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1942              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1943              replaced  by a single image created by compositing each image in
1944              turn, while respecting composition operators and  page  offsets.
1945              While  -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1946              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1947
1948              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1949              option.   If  the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1950              images, all images are flattened.  Also  see  -mosaic  which  is
1951              similar  to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1952              base image.
1953
1954              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1955              parent black canvas image:
1956
1957                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1958                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1959                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1960
1961
1962              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1963
1964                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1965
1966
1967       -flip  create a "mirror image"
1968
1969              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
1970
1971       -flop  create a "mirror image"
1972
1973              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
1974
1975       -font <name>
1976              use this font when annotating the image with text
1977
1978              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
1979              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a  TrueType  font,
1980              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
1981
1982       -foreground <color>
1983              define the foreground color
1984
1985              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
1986              -fill option.
1987
1988       -format <type>
1989              the image format type
1990
1991              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
1992              image  to  the  image format you specify.  See GraphicsMagick(1)
1993              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
1994              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
1995
1996              By  default  the file is written to its original name.  However,
1997              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
1998              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
1999              mat.  For example, if you specify tiff as the  format  type  and
2000              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2001              becomes image.tiff.
2002
2003       -format <string>
2004              output formatted image characteristics
2005
2006              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2007              output  written  to  the  'info:-'  file specification, use this
2008              option to print information about the image in a format of  your
2009              choosing.   You  can  include  the  image filename, type, width,
2010              height, Exif data, or other image attributes by  embedding  spe‐
2011              cial format characters:
2012
2013                   %b   file size
2014                   %c   comment
2015                   %d   directory
2016                   %e   filename extension
2017                   %f   filename
2018                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2019                   %h   height
2020                   %i   input filename
2021                   %k   number of unique colors
2022                   %l   label
2023                   %m   magick
2024                   %n   number of scenes
2025                   %o   output filename
2026                   %p   page number
2027                   %q   image bit depth
2028                   %r   image type description
2029                   %s   scene number
2030                   %t   top of filename
2031                   %u   unique temporary filename
2032                   %w   width
2033                   %x   horizontal resolution
2034                   %y   vertical resolution
2035                   %A   transparency supported
2036                   %C   compression type
2037                   %D   GIF disposal method
2038                   %G   Original width and height
2039                   %H   page height
2040                   %M   original filename specification
2041                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2042                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2043                   %Q   compression quality
2044                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2045                   %U   resolution units
2046                   %W   page width
2047                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2048                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2049                   %@   trim bounding box
2050                   %#   signature
2051                   \n   newline
2052                   \r   carriage return
2053                   %%   %
2054
2055
2056              For example,
2057
2058                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2059
2060
2061              displays  MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for an image titled bird.miff
2062              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2063
2064              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2065              file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
2066
2067              The values of image type (%p) which may be returned include:
2068
2069                   Bilevel
2070                   Grayscale
2071                   GrayscaleMatte
2072                   Palette
2073                   PaletteMatte
2074                   TrueColor
2075                   TrueColorMatte
2076                   ColorSeparation
2077                   ColorSeparationMatte
2078                   Optimize
2079
2080
2081              You  can  also  use  the  following special formatting syntax to
2082              print Exif information contained in the file:
2083
2084                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2085
2086
2087              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2088
2089                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2090                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2091                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2092                   ImageWidth
2093                   ImageLength
2094                   BitsPerSample
2095                   Compression
2096                   PhotometricInterpretation
2097                   FillOrder
2098                   DocumentName
2099                   ImageDescription
2100                   Make
2101                   Model
2102                   StripOffsets
2103                   Orientation
2104                   SamplesPerPixel
2105                   RowsPerStrip
2106                   StripByteCounts
2107                   XResolution
2108                   YResolution
2109                   PlanarConfiguration
2110                   ResolutionUnit
2111                   TransferFunction
2112                   Software
2113                   DateTime
2114                   Artist
2115                   WhitePoint
2116                   PrimaryChromaticities
2117                   TransferRange
2118                   JPEGProc
2119                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2120                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2121                   YCbCrCoefficients
2122                   YCbCrSubSampling
2123                   YCbCrPositioning
2124                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2125                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2126                   CFAPattern
2127                   BatteryLevel
2128                   Copyright
2129                   ExposureTime
2130                   FNumber
2131                   IPTC/NAA
2132                   ExifOffset
2133                   InterColorProfile
2134                   ExposureProgram
2135                   SpectralSensitivity
2136                   GPSInfo
2137                   ISOSpeedRatings
2138                   OECF
2139                   ExifVersion
2140                   DateTimeOriginal
2141                   DateTimeDigitized
2142                   ComponentsConfiguration
2143                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2144                   ShutterSpeedValue
2145                   ApertureValue
2146                   BrightnessValue
2147                   ExposureBiasValue
2148                   MaxApertureValue
2149                   SubjectDistance
2150                   MeteringMode
2151                   LightSource
2152                   Flash
2153                   FocalLength
2154                   MakerNote
2155                   UserComment
2156                   SubSecTime
2157                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2158                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2159                   FlashPixVersion
2160                   ColorSpace
2161                   ExifImageWidth
2162                   ExifImageLength
2163                   InteroperabilityOffset
2164                   FlashEnergy
2165                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2166                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2167                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2168                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2169                   SubjectLocation
2170                   ExposureIndex
2171                   SensingMethod
2172                   FileSource
2173                   SceneType
2174
2175
2176              JPEG specific information (from reading  a  JPEG  file)  may  be
2177              obtained like this:
2178
2179                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2180
2181
2182              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2183
2184                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2185                                      keyword=data format)
2186                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2187                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2188                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2189                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2190
2191
2192              Please  note  that  JPEG has no notion of "quality" and that the
2193              quality metric used by, and estimated by the software  is  based
2194              on  the  quality  metric  established  by  IJG  JPEG  6b.  Other
2195              encoders (e.g. that  used  by  Adobe  Photoshop)  use  different
2196              encoding metrics.
2197
2198              Surround  the  format specification with quotation marks to pre‐
2199              vent your shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces  and  square
2200              brackets.
2201
2202       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2203              surround the image with an ornamental border
2204
2205              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2206              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2207
2208              The color of the border is specified with the  -mattecolor  com‐
2209              mand line option.
2210
2211       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2212
2213       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2214              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2215
2216              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2217              color must be exact. Use this option to match  colors  that  are
2218              close  (in  Euclidean  distance)  to  the target color in RGB 3D
2219              space. For example, if you want to automatically trim the  edges
2220              of  an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the target
2221              background color may differ by a small amount. This  option  can
2222              account for these differences.
2223
2224              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2225              "%", as a percentage of the  maximum  possible  intensity  (255,
2226              65535, or 4294967295).
2227
2228       -gamma <value>
2229              level of gamma correction
2230
2231              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2232              look different due to differences in the  display  monitor.  Use
2233              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2234              values extend from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0  darkens  the
2235              image  and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large adjustments
2236              to image gamma may result in the loss of some image  information
2237              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2238              255).
2239
2240              You can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and  blue
2241              channels  of  the  image  with a gamma value list delimited with
2242              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2243
2244              Use +gamma value to set the image gamma level  without  actually
2245              adjusting  the  image pixels. This option is useful if the image
2246              is of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g.  PNG
2247              images).
2248
2249       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2250              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2251
2252              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2253
2254       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2255              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2256
2257              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2258              depending on the utility it is used with.
2259
2260              For the X11 commands ('animate', 'display',  and  'import'),  it
2261              specifies  the  preferred size and location of the Image window.
2262              By default, the window size is the image size and  the  location
2263              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2264               For  the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it may
2265              be used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.   In
2266              this  case,  symbols representing resize options may be appended
2267              to the geometry string to influence how the  resize  request  is
2268              treated.
2269
2270              See  later  notes corresponding to usage by particular commands.
2271              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2272              resize  request,  taking  into account the current properties of
2273              the image.
2274
2275              By default, the width and height are maximum  values.  That  is,
2276              the  image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and height
2277              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2278
2279              Append a ^ to the geometry so that the  image  aspect  ratio  is
2280              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2281              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2282
2283              Append a ! (exclamation point) to  the  geometry  to  force  the
2284              image  size to exactly the size you specify. For example, if you
2285              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2286              to 480.
2287
2288              If  only  the width is specified, without the trailing 'x', then
2289              height is set to width (e.g.,  -geometry  100  is  the  same  as
2290              -geometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified but with the
2291              trailing 'x', then width assumes the value  and  the  height  is
2292              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2293              only the height is specified prefixed by  'x'  (e.g.,  -geometry
2294              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2295
2296              To  specify  a percentage width or height instead, append %. The
2297              image size is multiplied by the width and height percentages  to
2298              obtain  the  final  image dimensions. To increase the size of an
2299              image, use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease  an
2300              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2301
2302              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2303
2304              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2305              height exceeds the geometry specification. < resizes  the  image
2306              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2307              fication. For example, if you specify '640x480>' and  the  image
2308              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2309              image is  512x512  or  1024x1024,  it  is  resized  to  480x480.
2310              Enclose the geometry specification in quotation marks to prevent
2311              the < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file  redi‐
2312              rection.
2313
2314              When  used  with animate and display, offsets are handled in the
2315              same manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.   If
2316              the  x  is  negative,  the  offset is measured leftward from the
2317              right edge of the screen to the right edge of  the  image  being
2318              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2319              edges.  The offsets are not affected by  "%";  they  are  always
2320              measured in pixels.
2321
2322              When  used as a composite option, -geometry gives the dimensions
2323              of the image and its location  with  respect  to  the  composite
2324              image.   If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East,
2325              or SouthEast gravity, the x represents  the  distance  from  the
2326              right  edge  of  the  image  to  the right edge of the composite
2327              image.  Similarly, if the -gravity option is present with South‐
2328              West,  South,  or  SouthEast  gravity, y is measured between the
2329              bottom edges. Accordingly, a positive offset will never point in
2330              the  direction  outside  of  the  image.   The  offsets  are not
2331              affected by "%"; they are always measured in pixels.  To specify
2332              the dimensions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2333
2334              When  used  as a convert, import or mogrify option, -geometry is
2335              synonymous with -resize and specifies the  size  of  the  output
2336              image.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2337
2338              When  used  as  a  montage option, -geometry specifies the image
2339              size and border size for  each  tile;  default  is  256x256+0+0.
2340              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2341              -gravity option affects the placement of the  image  within  the
2342              tile;  the  default  gravity for this purpose is Center.  If the
2343              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2344              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2345              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2346              option.
2347
2348       -gravity <type>
2349              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2350
2351              Choices  are:  NorthWest,  North, NorthEast, West, Center, East,
2352              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2353
2354              The direction you choose specifies where to  position  the  text
2355              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2356              text to be centered within the  image.  By  default,  the  image
2357              gravity  is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about graphic
2358              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2359              option.
2360
2361              The  -gravity  option is also used in concert with the -geometry
2362              option and other options that take <geometry>  as  a  parameter,
2363              such  as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how the
2364              -gravity option interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters  of  a
2365              geometry specification.
2366
2367              When  used  as an option to composite, -gravity gives the direc‐
2368              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2369
2370              When used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the  direction
2371              that  an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity is
2372              Center for this purpose.
2373
2374       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2375              green chromaticity primary point
2376
2377       -hald-clut <clut>
2378              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2379
2380              A Hald CLUT ("Color Look-Up Table") is a  special  square  color
2381              image  which  contains a look-up table for red, green, and blue.
2382              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2383              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2384              example, a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144  col‐
2385              ors)  and  of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).  A spe‐
2386              cial CLUT is the identity CLUT which which causes no  change  to
2387              the  input  image.   In order to use the Hald CLUT, one takes an
2388              identity CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The  modified
2389              CLUT  can  then  be used to transform any number of images in an
2390              identical way.
2391
2392              GraphicsMagick contains a built-in identity CLUT  generator  via
2393              the  IDENTITY  coder.   For  example  reading from the file name
2394              IDENTITY:8 returns an identity CLUT of order  8.   Typical  Hald
2395              CLUT  identity  images  have  an order of between 8 and 16.  The
2396              default order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.   Interpola‐
2397              tion  is  used so it is not usually necessary for CLUT images to
2398              be very large.  The PNG file format is ideal  for  storing  Hald
2399              CLUT images because it compresses them very well.
2400
2401       -help  print usage instructions
2402
2403       -highlight-color <color>
2404              pixel annotation color
2405
2406              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2407
2408       -highlight-style <style>
2409              pixel annotation style
2410
2411              Specifies  the  pixel  difference  annotation style used to draw
2412              attention to changed pixels. May be one  of  Assign,  Threshold,
2413              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2414              color (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel  with
2415              black  or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint alpha
2416              tints the pixel with the highlight color, and XOR  does  an  XOR
2417              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2418
2419       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2420              specify the icon geometry
2421
2422              Offsets,  if  present in the geometry specification, are handled
2423              in the same manner as the -geometry option, using X11  style  to
2424              handle negative offsets.
2425
2426       -iconic
2427              iconic animation
2428
2429       -immutable
2430              make image immutable
2431
2432       -implode <factor>
2433              implode image pixels about the center
2434
2435       -intent <type>
2436              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2437
2438              Use  this option to affect the the color management operation of
2439              an image (see -profile).  Choose from these  intents:  Absolute,
2440              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2441
2442              The default intent is undefined.
2443
2444       -interlace <type>
2445              the type of interlacing scheme
2446
2447              Choices  are:  None,  Line,  Plane, or Partition. The default is
2448              None.
2449
2450              This option is used to specify the type  of  interlacing  scheme
2451              for  raw  image  formats  such as RGB or YUV.  None means do not
2452              interlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2453
2454              Line            uses            scanline             interlacing
2455              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...),  and  Plane  uses  plane
2456              interlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2457
2458              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2459              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2460
2461              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2462              image.
2463
2464       -label <name>
2465              assign a label to an image
2466
2467              Use this option to assign a specific label to  the  image,  when
2468              writing  to  an image format that supports labels, such as TIFF,
2469              PNG, MIFF, or PostScript. You can include the  the  image  file‐
2470              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2471              special format character.  A label is not drawn  on  the  image,
2472              but  is  embedded  in  the image datastream via a "Label" tag or
2473              similar mechanism.  If you want the label to be visible  on  the
2474              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2475
2476              For example,
2477
2478                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2479
2480
2481              produces  an  image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
2482              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2483
2484              If the first character of string is @, the image label  is  read
2485              from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.
2486
2487              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2488              is stored.
2489
2490              In PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk  with
2491              the keyword "label".
2492
2493              When  converting  to  PostScript,  use  this option to specify a
2494              header string to print above the image. Specify the  label  font
2495              with -font.
2496
2497              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2498              image is displayed with the corresponding tile in  the  montage.
2499              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2500
2501
2502
2503       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2504              perform local adaptive thresholding
2505
2506              Perform  local  adaptive thresholding using the specified width,
2507              height, and offset.  The offset is a distance  in  sample  space
2508              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2509              imum sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option  is
2510              supplied,  then  the  offset  is computed as a percentage of the
2511              quantum range.  It is strongly recommended to  use  the  percent
2512              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2513
2514              For example,
2515
2516                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2517
2518
2519              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2520              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2521
2522       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2523              adjust the level of image contrast
2524
2525              Give one, two or three  values  delimited  with  commas:  black-
2526              point,  gamma,  white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or 2%,0.5,98%). The
2527              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2528              if  the  white point is omitted it is set to MaxRGB-black_point.
2529              If a "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the  black  and
2530              white  points  are  percentages  of MaxRGB. Gamma is an exponent
2531              that ranges from 0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted,  the  default  of
2532              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2533              lar to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input  Lev‐
2534              els" interface.
2535
2536       -limit <type> <value>
2537              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
2538              resource limit
2539
2540              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2541              resources  of  the system. The resource limits are Disk, maximum
2542              total disk space consumed; File, maximum number of file descrip‐
2543              tors  allowed  to  be open at once; Map, maximum total number of
2544              file bytes which may be memory  mapped;  Memory,  maximum  total
2545              number  of  bytes of heap memory used for image storage; Pixels,
2546              maximum absolute image size (per image);  Width,  maximum  image
2547              pixels  width; Height, maximum image pixels height; and Threads,
2548              the maximum number of worker threads to use  per  OpenMP  thread
2549              team.
2550
2551              These  resource limits are used to decide if (for a given image)
2552              the decoded image ("pixel cache") should be stored in heap  mem‐
2553              ory  (RAM),  in  a  memory-mapped  disk  file, or in a disk file
2554              accessed via read/write I/O.  The number of total pixels in  one
2555              image,  and/or the width/height, may also be limited in order to
2556              force the reading, or creation of images larger than  the  limit
2557              (in pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit establishes an
2558              overall limit since using the disk is the means of last  resort.
2559              When  the  disk  limit  has  been reached, no more images may be
2560              read.
2561
2562              The value argument is an absolute value, but may  have  standard
2563              binary  suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P', 'E')
2564              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2565              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2566              els 10MP' limits the maximum image size  to  10  megapixels  and
2567              '-limit  memory  32MB  -limit map 64MB' limits memory and memory
2568              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2569
2570              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2571              environment   variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,  MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2572              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2573              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH,  MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT,and OMP_NUM_THREADS may be
2574              used to set the limits for disk space, open files, memory mapped
2575              size,  heap memory, per-image pixels, image width, image height,
2576              and threads respectively.
2577
2578              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2579
2580       -linewidth
2581              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2582
2583       -list <type>
2584              the type of list
2585
2586              Choices are: Color, Delegate, Format, Magic,  Module,  Resource,
2587              or  Type.  The Module option is only available if GraphicsMagick
2588              was built to support loadable modules.
2589
2590              This option lists information about the GraphicsMagick  configu‐
2591              ration.
2592
2593       -log <string>
2594              Specify format for debug log
2595
2596              This  option  specifies  the format for the log printed when the
2597              -debug option is active.
2598
2599              You can display the following components  by  embedding  special
2600              format characters:
2601
2602                   %d   domain
2603                   %e   event
2604                   %f   function
2605                   %l   line
2606                   %m   module
2607                   %p   process ID
2608                   %r   real CPU time
2609                   %t   wall clock time
2610                   %u   user CPU time
2611                   %%   percent sign
2612                   \n   newline
2613                   \r   carriage return
2614
2615
2616              For example:
2617
2618                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2619
2620
2621              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2622
2623       -loop <iterations>
2624              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2625
2626              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2627              to iterations times.
2628
2629       -magnify
2630              magnify the image
2631
2632              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2633
2634       -magnify <factor>
2635              magnify the image
2636
2637              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2638
2639       -map <filename>
2640              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2641
2642              [convert or mogrify]
2643
2644              By default, color reduction chooses an  optimal  set  of  colors
2645              that  best  represent the original image. Alternatively, you can
2646              choose a particular set of colors from an image file  with  this
2647              option.
2648
2649              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2650              to a single optimal set of colors that best  represent  all  the
2651              images.   The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance
2652              of any option.  If the +map option  appears  after  all  of  the
2653              input images, all images are mapped.
2654
2655       -map <type>
2656              display image using this type.
2657
2658              [animate or display]
2659
2660              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2661
2662                   best
2663                   default
2664                   gray
2665                   red
2666                   green
2667                   blue
2668
2669
2670              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2671              erwise an error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type  and  display
2672              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2673              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2674              Colormaps.
2675
2676       -mask <filename>
2677              Specify a clipping mask
2678
2679              The  image  read  from  the file is used as a clipping mask.  It
2680              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2681
2682              If the mask image contains an opacity channel,  the  opacity  of
2683              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2684              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2685              modified  while  masked  pixels  (not  black) are protected from
2686              alteration.
2687
2688              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2689
2690              It is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip  is
2691              implied by -mask.
2692
2693       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2694
2695              If  the  image  does  not have a matte channel, create an opaque
2696              one.
2697
2698              Use +matte to ignore the matte channel and to  avoid  writing  a
2699              matte channel in the output file.
2700
2701       -mattecolor <color>
2702              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2703
2704              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2705              -fill option.
2706
2707       -maximum-error <limit>
2708              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2709
2710              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2711              parison  using  a specified metric) before an error ("image dif‐
2712              ference exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported  via
2713              a non-zero command execution return status.
2714
2715       -median <radius>
2716              apply a median filter to the image
2717
2718       -metric <metric>
2719              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2720
2721       -minify <factor>
2722              minify the image
2723
2724              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2725
2726       -mode <value>
2727              mode of operation
2728
2729              The  available  montage modes are frame to place the images in a
2730              rectangular grid while adding  a  decorative  frame  with  drop‐
2731              shadow,  unframe  to  place  undecorated images in a rectangular
2732              grid, and concatenate to pack the images closely together  with‐
2733              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2734
2735       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2736              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2737
2738              Specify  the percent change in brightness, color saturation, and
2739              hue separated by commas. Default argument values  are  100  per‐
2740              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2741              brightness by 20% and decrease the color saturation by  10%  and
2742              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2743
2744              Hue  is  the  percentage  of  absolute rotation from the current
2745              position. For example 50 results in a counter-clockwise rotation
2746              of  90  degrees,  150  results  in  a  clockwise  rotation of 90
2747              degrees, with 0 and 200 both resulting  in  a  rotation  of  180
2748              degrees.
2749
2750       -monitor
2751              show progress indication
2752
2753              A  simple  command-line  progress  indication is shown while the
2754              command is running. The process indication shows  the  operation
2755              currently  being  performed  and the percent completed. Commands
2756              using X11 may replace the command line progress indication  with
2757              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2758
2759       -monochrome
2760              transform the image to black and white
2761
2762       -morph <frames>
2763              morphs an image sequence
2764
2765              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2766              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2767
2768              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2769              option.   If  the  -morph  option appears after all of the input
2770              images, all images are morphed.
2771
2772       -mosaic
2773              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2774
2775              The -mosaic option provides a flexible way to composite  one  or
2776              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2777              -flatten except that a base canvas image is  automatically  cre‐
2778              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2779              and page offsets of images to be composited.  The color  of  the
2780              base  canvas  image  may be set via the -background option.  The
2781              default canvas color is 'white', but  'black'  or  'transparent'
2782              may  be  more  suitable  depending  on the composition algorithm
2783              requested.
2784
2785              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2786              rithm  to  use when compositing the subsequent image on the base
2787              canvas.
2788
2789              The -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of  the
2790              mosaic  and  to position the subsequent image within the mosaic.
2791              If the -page argument does not specify width  and  height,  then
2792              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2793              offsets.
2794
2795              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2796              option.   If  the  -mosaic option appears after all of the input
2797              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2798
2799              The following is an example of composing an image based on  red,
2800              green,  and  blue layers extracted from a sequence of images and
2801              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2802
2803                  gm convert -background black \
2804                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2805                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2806                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2807                            -mosaic output.png
2808
2809
2810       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2811              Simulate motion blur
2812
2813              Simulate motion blur by convolving the  image  with  a  Gaussian
2814              operator of the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2815              reasonable results, radius  should  be  larger  than  sigma.  If
2816              radius is zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2817              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2818              coming from (side which is blurred).
2819
2820       -name  name an image
2821
2822       -negate
2823              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2824
2825              The  red,  green,  and blue intensities of an image are negated.
2826              White becomes black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use  +negate  to
2827              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2828
2829       -noise <radius|type>
2830              add or reduce noise in an image
2831
2832              The  principal  function  of noise peak elimination filter is to
2833              smooth the objects within an image without losing edge  informa‐
2834              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2835              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2836              value  within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to be
2837              noise. A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel  is
2838              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2839
2840              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2841
2842              Use  +noise  followed  by a noise type to add noise to an image.
2843              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2844              these noise types:
2845
2846                   Uniform
2847                   Gaussian
2848                   Multiplicative
2849                   Impulse
2850                   Laplacian
2851                   Poisson
2852                   Random (uniform distribution)
2853
2854
2855       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2856
2857              The  -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images and
2858              reset all options to their default values, when no other  option
2859              is desired.
2860
2861       -normalize
2862              transform image to span the full range of color values
2863
2864              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2865              togram.
2866
2867              When computing the contrast enhancement  values,  the  histogram
2868              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2869              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2870              dom  noise  or minute details) are ignored.  The default is that
2871              0.1 percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The  percent‐
2872              age  of  the  histogram  to ignore may be specified by using the
2873              -set option with the histogram-threshold  parameter  similar  to
2874              -set  histogram-threshold  0.01  to specify 0.01 percent.  Use 0
2875              percent to use the entire histogram,  with  possibly  diminished
2876              contrast enhancement.
2877
2878       -opaque <color>
2879              change this color to the pen color within the image
2880
2881              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2882              -fill option.  The color is replaced if it is identical  to  the
2883              target  color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D space
2884              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2885
2886              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2887
2888       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2889              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
2890              channel
2891
2892              Apply  a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to a
2893              selected image channel or all image channels.  Operations  which
2894              result  in  negative  results  are reset to zero, and operations
2895              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2896              sible value.
2897
2898              Select  a  channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan,
2899              Magenta, Yellow, Black, All, or  Gray.  All  only  modifies  the
2900              color  channels  and does not modify the Opacity channel. Except
2901              for the threshold operators, All operates on each channel  inde‐
2902              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2903
2904              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2905              forms the requested operation on the equivalent pixel  intensity
2906              so  the  result  is  a gray image.  Select an operator from Add,
2907              And, Assign, Depth, Divide, Gamma,  Negate,  LShift,  Log,  Max,
2908              Min,  Multiply,  Or, Pow RShift, Subtract, Threshold, Threshold-
2909              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2910              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2911              Noise-Multiplicative, Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and  Noise-
2912              Uniform.
2913
2914              Rvalue  may  be  any  floating  point or integer value. Normally
2915              rvalue will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is  the
2916              largest  quantum  value  supported  by  the GraphicsMagick build
2917              (255, 65535, or 4294967295) but values outside  this  range  are
2918              useful  for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical or
2919              bit-wise operations are rounded to  a  positive  integral  value
2920              prior  to  use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to the argu‐
2921              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2922
2923              The following is a description of the operators:
2924
2925
2926               Add
2927
2928                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2929
2930               And
2931
2932                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2933
2934               Assign
2935
2936                    Result is rvalue.
2937
2938               Depth
2939
2940                    Result is  channel  value  adjusted  so  that  it  may  be
2941                    (approximately)  stored  in  the  specified number of bits
2942                    without additional loss.
2943
2944               Divide
2945
2946                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2947
2948               Gamma
2949
2950                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2951
2952               LShift
2953
2954                    Result is channel value bitwise  left  shifted  by  rvalue
2955                    bits.
2956
2957               Log
2958
2959                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
2960
2961               Max
2962
2963                    Result  is  assigned  to  rvalue if rvalue is greater than
2964                    value.
2965
2966               Min
2967
2968                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
2969
2970               Multiply
2971
2972                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
2973
2974               Negate
2975
2976                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
2977                    An  rvalue  must  be  supplied  but is currently not used.
2978                    Inverting the image twice results in the original image.
2979
2980               Or
2981
2982                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
2983
2984               Pow
2985
2986                    Result is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to  Gamma
2987                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
2988
2989               RShift
2990
2991                    Result  is  channel  value bitwise right shifted by rvalue
2992                    bits.
2993
2994               Subtract
2995
2996                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
2997
2998               Threshold
2999
3000                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3001                    rvalue,  or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal to
3002                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3003                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3004
3005               Threshold-white
3006
3007                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3008                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3009                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3010                    bright parts of an image. If all channels  are  specified,
3011                    then  thresholding  is done based on computed pixel inten‐
3012                    sity.
3013
3014               Threshold-White-Negate
3015
3016                    Result is set to black if channel value  is  greater  than
3017                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3018                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3019                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3020
3021               Threshold-black
3022
3023                    Result  is  minimum  (black) if channel value is less than
3024                    than rvalue and is unchanged if  it  is  greater  than  or
3025                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3026                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3027                    ified,  then  thresholding is done based on computed pixel
3028                    intensity.
3029
3030               Threshold-Black-Negate
3031
3032                    Result is set to white if channel value is less than  than
3033                    rvalue  and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal to
3034                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3035                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3036
3037               Xor
3038
3039                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3040                    interesting property of XOR is that  performing  the  same
3041                    operation twice results in the original value.
3042
3043               Noise-Gaussian
3044
3045                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with gauss‐
3046                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3047
3048               Noise-Impulse
3049
3050                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3051                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3052
3053               Noise-Laplacian
3054
3055                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with lapla‐
3056                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3057
3058               Noise-Multiplicative
3059
3060                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  multi‐
3061                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3062                    fied by rvalue.
3063
3064               Noise-Poisson
3065
3066                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3067                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3068
3069               Noise-Random
3070
3071                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with random
3072                    (uniform distribution) noise according  to  the  intensity
3073                    specified   by   rvalue.    The  initial  noise  intensity
3074                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3075
3076               Noise-Uniform
3077
3078                    Result is the channel value  with  uniform  noise  applied
3079                    according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084               As  an  example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value to a
3085               channel. For example, this command sets the red channel to  the
3086               mid-range value:
3087
3088                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3089
3090
3091               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3092               a gray image:
3093
3094                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3095
3096
3097       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3098              ordered dither the image
3099
3100              The channel or channels specified in  the  channeltype  argument
3101              are  reduced  to  binary,  using  an  ordered dither method. The
3102              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3103              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3104
3105              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3106              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3107              channels.   Separately,  the  opacity channel is dithered into a
3108              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3109
3110              When channeltype is "Intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3111              dithered.  When  channeltype  is  "opacity" or "matte", only the
3112              opacity channel is dithered. When a color channel is  specified,
3113              only that channel is dithered.
3114
3115              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3116              pixel tiles.  In each tile, some or all  pixels  are  turned  to
3117              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3118              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3119              turned  to  white  in  an order that maximizes dispersion (i.e.,
3120              reduces granularity), while for N ==  5,  6,  and  7,  they  are
3121              turned  to  white  in  an  order that creates a roughly circular
3122              black blob in the middle of each  tile.   An  attractive  "half-
3123              tone"  looking image can be obtained by first rotating the image
3124              45 degrees, performing  a  5x5  ordered-dither  operation,  then
3125              rotating it back to the original orientation and cropping to the
3126              original image dimensions.  If  the  original  image  is  gamma-
3127              encoded,  it  is  adviseable  to  convert it to linear intensity
3128              first, e.g., with the "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3129
3130       -output-directory <directory>
3131              output files to directory
3132
3133              Use -output-directory to specify  a  directory  under  which  to
3134              write  the  output  files. Normally mogrify overwrites the input
3135              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3136              different  directory tree so that the input files are preserved.
3137              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3138              in  the  output  path  so  that  the  user-specified  input path
3139              (including any sub-directory part) is  appended  to  the  output
3140              path.  If  the  input  file  lacks an extension, then a suitable
3141              extension is automatically added to the output file.   The  user
3142              is responsible for creating the output directory specified as an
3143              argument, but subdirectories will be created as  needed  if  the
3144              -create-directories option is supplied.  This option may be used
3145              to apply transformations on files from one directory  and  write
3146              the  transformed files to a different directory.  In conjunction
3147              with -create-directories, this option  is  designed  to  support
3148              transforming  whole  directory  trees of files provided that the
3149              relative path of the input file is included as part the list  of
3150              filenames.
3151
3152       -orient <orientation>
3153              Set the image orientation attribute
3154
3155              Sets  the  image  orientation  attribute.  The image orientation
3156              attribute is compatible with the TIFF orientation tag  (and  the
3157              EXIF  orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined, TopLeft,
3158              TopRight, BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop,  RightBot‐
3159              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3160              tom).  Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an  EXIF
3161              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3162              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3163              sible  for  an image file to indicate its orientation in several
3164              different ways simultaneously.
3165
3166       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3167              size and location of an image canvas
3168
3169              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3170              in  dots  per  inch  or a TEXT page in pixels. The choices for a
3171              PostScript page are:
3172
3173                   11x17         792  1224
3174                   Ledger       1224   792
3175                   Legal         612  1008
3176                   Letter        612   792
3177                   LetterSmall   612   792
3178                   ArchE        2592  3456
3179                   ArchD        1728  2592
3180                   ArchC        1296  1728
3181                   ArchB         864  1296
3182                   ArchA         648   864
3183                   A0           2380  3368
3184                   A1           1684  2380
3185                   A2           1190  1684
3186                   A3            842  1190
3187                   A4            595   842
3188                   A4Small       595   842
3189                   A5            421   595
3190                   A6            297   421
3191                   A7            210   297
3192                   A8            148   210
3193                   A9            105   148
3194                   A10            74   105
3195                   B0           2836  4008
3196                   B1           2004  2836
3197                   B2           1418  2004
3198                   B3           1002  1418
3199                   B4            709  1002
3200                   B5            501   709
3201                   C0           2600  3677
3202                   C1           1837  2600
3203                   C2           1298  1837
3204                   C3            918  1298
3205                   C4            649   918
3206                   C5            459   649
3207                   C6            323   459
3208                   Flsa          612   936
3209                   Flse          612   936
3210                   HalfLetter    396   612
3211
3212
3213              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3214              Ledger,  etc.).  Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much like -geometry
3215              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3216
3217              This option is also used to place subimages when  writing  to  a
3218              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3219              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3220              the  top  left  corner of the canvas and are not affected by the
3221              -gravity  option.   To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG   image,   use
3222              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y>  (e.g.  -page  +100+200).  When writing to a
3223              MNG file, a -page option appearing ahead of the first  image  in
3224              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3225              height values that are written in the  MHDR  chunk.   Otherwise,
3226              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3227              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3228              only  the  bounding  box  method is used to determine its dimen‐
3229              sions.
3230
3231              For a PostScript page, the image is sized as  in  -geometry  and
3232              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3233              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3234              center  the image within the page. If the image size exceeds the
3235              PostScript page, it is reduced to fit  the  page.   The  default
3236              gravity  for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x and
3237              y offset are measured rightward and downward from the  top  left
3238              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3239              value other than NorthWest.
3240
3241              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3242
3243              This option is used in concert with -density.
3244
3245              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3246
3247       -paint <radius>
3248              simulate an oil painting
3249
3250              Each pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a  circular
3251              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3252
3253       -pause <seconds>
3254              pause between animation loops [animate]
3255
3256              Pause  for  the specified number of seconds before repeating the
3257              animation.
3258
3259       -pause <seconds>
3260              pause between snapshots [import]
3261
3262              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3263              snapshot.
3264
3265       -pen <color>
3266              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3267
3268       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3269
3270              Use  this  option  to  disable  reading the image pixels so that
3271              image characteristics  such  as  the  image  dimensions  may  be
3272              obtained  very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force reading
3273              the image pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included  in
3274              the displayed information.
3275
3276       -pointsize <value>
3277              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3278
3279       -preview <type>
3280              image preview type
3281
3282              Use  this  option  to  affect  the preview operation of an image
3283              (e.g.   convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma   Preview:gamma.png).
3284              Choose from these previews:
3285
3286                   Rotate
3287                   Shear
3288                   Roll
3289                   Hue
3290                   Saturation
3291                   Brightness
3292                   Gamma
3293                   Spiff
3294                   Dull
3295                   Grayscale
3296                   Quantize
3297                   Despeckle
3298                   ReduceNoise
3299                   AddNoise
3300                   Sharpen
3301                   Blur
3302                   Threshold
3303                   EdgeDetect
3304                   Spread
3305                   Shade
3306                   Raise
3307                   Segment
3308                   Solarize
3309                   Swirl
3310                   Implode
3311                   Wave
3312                   OilPaint
3313                   CharcoalDrawing
3314                   JPEG
3315
3316
3317              The default preview is JPEG.
3318
3319       -process <command>
3320              process a sequence of images using a process module
3321
3322              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3323              where module is the name of the module  to  invoke  (e.g.  "ana‐
3324              lyze")  and  arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN  are an arbitrary number of
3325              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3326              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3327
3328              If  the  -process  option appears after all of the input images,
3329              all images are processed.
3330
3331       -profile <filename>
3332              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3333
3334              -profile filename adds  an  ICM  (ICC  color  management),  IPTC
3335              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to
3336              the image
3337
3338              Use +profile icm, +profile iptc,  or  +profile  profile_name  to
3339              remove the respective profile.  Multiple profiles may be listed,
3340              separated by commas. Profiles may be  excluded  from  subsequent
3341              listed  matches  by  preceding  their  name  with an exclamation
3342              point.  For  example,  +profile  '!icm,*'  strips  all  profiles
3343              except  for  the ICM profile.  Use identify -verbose to find out
3344              what profiles are in the image file.  Use +profile "*" to remove
3345              all  profiles.  Writing the image to a format that does not sup‐
3346              port profiles will of course  also  cause  all  profiles  to  be
3347              removed.   The JPEG and PNG formats will store any profiles that
3348              have been read and not removed.  In JPEG they are stored in APP1
3349              markers,  and in PNG they are stored as hex-coded binary in com‐
3350              pressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC chunk which is stored in
3351              the iCCP chunk.
3352
3353              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3354              simply write the file to an image format  such  as  APP1,  8BIM,
3355              ICM, or IPTC.
3356
3357              For  example,  to extract the Exif data (which is stored in JPEG
3358              files in the APP1 profile), use
3359
3360
3361                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3362
3363              Note that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any  profile
3364              to  reflect  changes made to the image, e.g., rotation from por‐
3365              trait to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the  pre‐
3366              served profile may contain invalid data.
3367
3368       -preserve-timestamp
3369              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3370
3371              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3372              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3373
3374       +progress
3375              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3376
3377              By default, when an image is displayed, a progress  monitor  bar
3378              is  shown  in  the  top left corner of an existing image display
3379              window, and the current cursor is  replaced  with  an  hourglass
3380              cursor.  Use  +progress to disable the progress monitor and busy
3381              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3382              disabled  for  all  operations,  the busy cursor continues to be
3383              enabled for non-display operations  such  as  image  processing.
3384              This option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or
3385              when a "clean" look is desired.
3386
3387       -quality <value>
3388              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3389               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3390              quality  and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but least
3391              effective compression). The default  quality  is  75.   Use  the
3392              -sampling-factor  option to specify the factors for chroma down‐
3393              sampling.  To use the same quality value as that  found  by  the
3394              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3395
3396              For  the  MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while using ZIP
3397              compression, quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which  is
3398              0  (worst  but  fastest compression) to 9 (best but slowest). It
3399              has no effect on the image appearance, since the compression  is
3400              always lossless.
3401
3402              For  the  JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using a non-
3403              linear equation to the compression ratio required by the  Jasper
3404              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3405              imate the quality provided by the JPEG v1  format.  The  default
3406              quality  value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression. The
3407              quality value 100 results in a request  for  non-lossy  compres‐
3408              sion.
3409
3410              For  the  MNG  and PNG image formats, the quality value sets the
3411              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3412              10).  Compression  levels  range from 0 (fastest compression) to
3413              100 (best but slowest). For compression level  0,  the  Huffman-
3414              only  strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily the
3415              worst compression.
3416
3417              If filter-type is 4 or less, the specified filter-type  is  used
3418              for all scanlines:
3419
3420                   0: none
3421                   1: sub
3422                   2: up
3423                   3: average
3424                   4: Paeth
3425
3426
3427              If  filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality is
3428              greater than 50 and the image does not have a color map,  other‐
3429              wise no filtering is used.
3430
3431              If  filter-type  is  6,  adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-
3432              absolute-values is used.
3433
3434              Only if the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the  LOCO  color
3435              transformation  and adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3436              lute-values are used.
3437
3438              The default is quality is 75, which means nearly the  best  com‐
3439              pression  with  adaptive  filtering.  The quality setting has no
3440              effect on the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since  the  com‐
3441              pression is always lossless.
3442
3443              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3444
3445              When  writing  a JNG image with transparency, two quality values
3446              are required, one for the main image and one for  the  grayscale
3447              image  that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as a
3448              single integer equal to the main image quality plus  1000  times
3449              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3450              for the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity  data,
3451              use -quality 90075.
3452
3453              For  the  PNM  family  of  formats (PNM, PGM, and PPM) specify a
3454              quality factor of zero in order to obtain the ASCII  variant  of
3455              the  format. Note that -compress none used to be used to trigger
3456              ASCII output but  provided  the  opposite  result  of  what  was
3457              expected as compared with other formats.
3458
3459              For  the  TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and Zstd compression
3460              algorithms are influenced by the quality value.  JPEG  and  WebP
3461              provide  lossy  compression  so higher quality produces a larger
3462              file with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression  algo‐
3463              rithms  (and  WebP  in lossless mode) are lossless and for these
3464              algorithms a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce  a
3465              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3466
3467       -raise <width>x<height>
3468              lighten or darken image edges
3469
3470              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3471              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3472
3473              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3474
3475       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3476              random threshold the image
3477
3478              The channel or channels specified in the <channeltype>  argument
3479              are  reduced  to  binary,  using an random-threshold method. The
3480              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3481              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3482
3483              When  channeltype  is  "All",  the color samples are thresholded
3484              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3485              color  channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is thresholded
3486              into a bilevel opacity value which  is  stored  in  the  opacity
3487              channel.  For  each pixel, a new random number is used to estab‐
3488              lish the threshold to be used. The threshold never  exceeds  the
3489              specified  maximum  (HIGH)  and is never less than the specified
3490              minimum (LOW).
3491
3492              When channeltype is "intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3493              thresholded.  When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only the
3494              opacity channel is thresholded. The other  named  channels  only
3495              threshold the associated channel.
3496
3497       -recolor <matrix>
3498              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3499
3500              A  user  supplied  color translation matrix (expressed as a text
3501              string) is used to translate/blend the image channels  based  on
3502              weightings  in  a supplied matrix which may be of order 3 (color
3503              channels only), 4 (color channels plus  opacity),  or  5  (color
3504              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3505              matrix (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers  with
3506              the  existing channel values and added together according to the
3507              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3508              negative.   The  offset column (column 5) is purely additive and
3509              is scaled such that 0.0 to 1.0 represents  the  maximum  quantum
3510              range  (but  values are not limited to this range). The math for
3511              the color translation matrix is similar to that  used  by  Adobe
3512              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3513              set by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results  are
3514              independent of quantum depth.
3515
3516              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3517              no change to the image.  The translation matrix should be  based
3518              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3519
3520              Identity matrix of order 3
3521
3522                1 0 0
3523                0 1 0
3524                0 0 1
3525
3526
3527              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3528              to (comma is treated as white space):
3529
3530                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3531
3532
3533              Identity matrix of order 4
3534
3535                1 0 0 0
3536                0 1 0 0
3537                0 0 1 0
3538                0 0 0 1
3539
3540
3541              Identity matrix of order 5.  The last row is required  to  exist
3542              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3543
3544                1 0 0 0 0
3545                0 1 0 0 0
3546                0 0 1 0 0
3547                0 0 0 1 0
3548                0 0 0 0 1
3549
3550
3551              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3552              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3553
3554                0 0 1
3555                0 1 0
3556                1 0 0
3557
3558
3559              and an RGB image using standard Rec.709 primaries  may  be  con‐
3560              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3561              tors:
3562
3563                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3564                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3565                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3566
3567
3568              and contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding  a
3569              10% offset:
3570
3571                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3572                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3573                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3574                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3575                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3576
3577
3578       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3579              red chromaticity primary point
3580
3581       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3582              apply options to a portion of the image
3583
3584              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3585
3586       -remote
3587              perform a X11 remote operation
3588
3589              The  -remote  command  sends  a command to a "gm display" or "gm
3590              animate" which is already running. The only  command  recognized
3591              at this time is the name of an image file to load. This capabil‐
3592              ity is very useful to load new images without needing to restart
3593              GraphicsMagick  (e.g.  for a slide-show or to use GraphicsMagick
3594              as the display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also  see  the
3595              +progress  option for a way to disable progress indication for a
3596              clean look while loading new images.
3597
3598       -render
3599              render vector operations
3600
3601              Use +render to turn off rendering  vector  operations.  This  is
3602              useful  when  saving the result to vector formats such as MVG or
3603              SVG.
3604
3605       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3606              Adjust image page offsets
3607
3608              Adjust the current image page canvas and  position  based  on  a
3609              relative  page specification.  This option may be used to change
3610              the location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior  to
3611              composition.    If   the   geometry  specification  is  absolute
3612              (includes a '!'), then the offset  adjustment  is  absolute  and
3613              there  is  no adjustment to page width and height, otherwise the
3614              page width and height values are also adjusted based on the cur‐
3615              rent  image  dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image page off‐
3616              sets to default.
3617
3618       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3619              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3620
3621              Resize the image so that its rendered size remains the  same  as
3622              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3623              rent image resolution units or the previously  set  with  -units
3624              are  used  to  interpret the argument. For example, if a 300 DPI
3625              image renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device,  when
3626              the  image  has  been  resampled  to 72 DPI, it will render at 3
3627              inches by 2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only  a  small
3628              number  of  image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF) are capable
3629              of storing the image resolution. For formats which do  not  sup‐
3630              port  an  image resolution, the original resolution of the image
3631              must be specified via -density on  the  command  line  prior  to
3632              specifying the resample resolution.
3633
3634              Note  that  Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution from a
3635              proprietary embedded profile. If  this  profile  exists  in  the
3636              image, then Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3637              former resolution, ignoring the image  resolution  specified  in
3638              the standard file header.
3639
3640              Some  image  formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric or english
3641              units so even if the original image used a particular unit  sys‐
3642              tem,  if  it is saved to a different format prior to resampling,
3643              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3644              using  -units  since  the  original units may have been lost. In
3645              other words,  do  not  assume  that  the  resolution  units  are
3646              restored if the image has been saved to a file.
3647
3648       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3649              resize an image
3650
3651              This  is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in the
3652              same manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize  option,
3653              the specified filter is used.
3654
3655              There are some exceptions:
3656
3657              When  used  as a composite option, -resize conveys the preferred
3658              size of the output image, while -geometry conveys the  size  and
3659              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3660
3661              When  used  as  a  montage option, -resize conveys the preferred
3662              size of the montage, while -geometry conveys  information  about
3663              the tiles.
3664
3665       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3666              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3667
3668              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3669              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3670
3671              A negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative  y
3672              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3673
3674       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3675              rotate the image
3676
3677              Positive  angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction while
3678              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3679
3680              Use > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the  height.
3681              <  rotates  the image only if its width is less than the height.
3682              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3683              480x640,  the  image  is  not rotated.  However, if the image is
3684              640x480, it is rotated by -90 degrees.   If  you  use  >  or  <,
3685              enclose it in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3686              preted as a file redirection.
3687
3688              Empty triangles left over from rotating  the  image  are  filled
3689              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3690              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3691              -fill option.
3692
3693       -sample <geometry>
3694              scale image using pixel sampling
3695
3696              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3697              -sample ignores the -filter selection if the -filter  option  is
3698              present.   Offsets,  if  present  in  the  geometry  string, are
3699              ignored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3700
3701       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3702              chroma subsampling factors
3703
3704              This option specifies the sampling factors to  be  used  by  the
3705              DPX,  JPEG,  MPEG,  or YUV encoders for chroma downsampling. The
3706              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3707              mat  since  it  is  not preserved in the file header.  Industry-
3708              standard video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also  be
3709              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3710              specification of "2x1"
3711
3712              The JPEG decoder obtains  the  original  sampling  factors  (and
3713              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3714              nal sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is  output,
3715              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3716
3717       -scale <geometry>
3718              scale the image.
3719
3720              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3721              -scale uses a simpler, faster  algorithm,  and  it  ignores  the
3722              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3723              present in the geometry string, are ignored,  and  the  -gravity
3724              option has no effect.
3725
3726       -scene <value>
3727              set scene number
3728
3729              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3730              in an image sequence.
3731
3732       -scenes <value-value>
3733              range of image scene numbers to read
3734
3735              Each image in the range is read with the filename followed by  a
3736              period  (.)  and  the decimal scene number.  You can change this
3737              behavior by embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or  %0Nx  printf
3738              format specification in the file name. For example,
3739
3740                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3741
3742
3743              makes   a  montage  of  files  image.miff.5,  image.miff.6,  and
3744              image.miff.7, and
3745
3746                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3747
3748
3749              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3750
3751       -screen
3752              specify the screen to capture
3753
3754              This option indicates that the GetImage request used  to  obtain
3755              the  image  should  be  done  on  the  root  window, rather than
3756              directly on the specified window.  In this way, you  can  obtain
3757              pieces  of  other windows that overlap the specified window, and
3758              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3759              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3760
3761       -set <attribute> <value>
3762              set an image attribute
3763
3764              Set  a  named image attribute.  The attribute is set on the cur‐
3765              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3766
3767       +set <attribute>
3768              unset an image attribute
3769
3770              Unset a named image attribute.  The attribute  is  removed  from
3771              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3772
3773       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3774              segment an image
3775
3776              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3777              nents and identifying units that are homogeneous with the  fuzzy
3778              c-means technique.
3779
3780              Segmentation  is  a  very  useful fast and and approximate color
3781              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3782              toons.  It may also be used as a special effect. Specify cluster
3783              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3784              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3785              detail, this may need to be a tiny fraction of a  percent  (e.g.
3786              0.015)  so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing thresh‐
3787              old eliminates noise in the second derivative of the  histogram.
3788              As  the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second de‐
3789              rivative. The default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to  see  a
3790              dump  of  cluster statistics given the parameters used. The sta‐
3791              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3792
3793       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3794              shade the image using a distant light source
3795
3796              Specify azimuth and elevation  as  the  position  of  the  light
3797              source.  Use +shade to return the shading results as a grayscale
3798              image.
3799
3800       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3801              shadow the montage
3802
3803       -shared-memory
3804              use shared memory
3805
3806              This option specifies whether the utility should attempt to  use
3807              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3808              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
3809              extension.   Otherwise,  this option is ignored.  The default is
3810              True.
3811
3812       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3813              sharpen the image
3814
3815              Use a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard  devia‐
3816              tion (sigma).
3817
3818       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3819              shave pixels from the image edges
3820
3821              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3822              the image and the height of the regions to be removed  from  top
3823              and bottom.
3824
3825       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3826              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3827
3828              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3829
3830              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3831              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3832              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3833              axis. The amount of the shear is controlled by  a  shear  angle.
3834              For  X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the Y
3835              axis, and similarly, for Y direction shears y  degrees  is  mea‐
3836              sured relative to the X axis.
3837
3838              Empty  triangles  left  over  from shearing the image are filled
3839              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3840              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3841              -fill option.
3842
3843       -silent
3844              operate silently
3845
3846       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3847              width and height of the image
3848
3849              Use this option to specify the width and height  of  raw  images
3850              whose  dimensions  are  unknown  such  as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK. In
3851              addition to width and height, use -size with an offset  to  skip
3852              any header information in the image or tell the number of colors
3853              in a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3854
3855              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3856
3857                   192x128
3858                   384x256
3859                   768x512
3860                   1536x1024
3861                   3072x2048
3862
3863
3864              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3865              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3866
3867       -snaps <value>
3868              number of screen snapshots
3869
3870              Use  this  option  to grab more than one image from the X server
3871              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3872
3873       -solarize <factor>
3874              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3875
3876              Specify factor as the percent threshold of the  intensity  (0  -
3877              99.9%).
3878
3879              This  option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing a
3880              photographic film to light during the development process.
3881
3882       -spread <amount>
3883              displace image pixels by a random amount
3884
3885              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3886              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3887
3888       -stegano <offset>
3889              hide watermark within an image
3890
3891              Use  an  offset  to start the image hiding some number of pixels
3892              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3893              size.   You  will  need this information to recover the stegano‐
3894              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3895
3896       -stereo
3897              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3898
3899              The left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel  of
3900              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3901              Red-green stereo glasses  are  required  to  properly  view  the
3902              stereo image.
3903
3904       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3905
3906              All  embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from the
3907              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3908              put files need to be as small as possible
3909
3910              Be  careful  not to use this option to remove author, copyright,
3911              and license information that you are  required  to  retain  when
3912              redistributing an image.
3913
3914       -stroke <color>
3915              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3916
3917              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3918              -fill option.
3919
3920              See -draw for further details.
3921
3922       -strokewidth <value>
3923              set the stroke width
3924
3925              See -draw for further details.
3926
3927       -swirl <degrees>
3928              swirl image pixels about the center
3929
3930              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3931
3932       -text-font <name>
3933              font for writing fixed-width text
3934
3935              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed  (type‐
3936              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3937
3938              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
3939              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType  font
3940              and x:fixed is X11.
3941
3942       -texture <filename>
3943              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3944
3945       -threshold <value>{%}
3946              threshold the image
3947
3948              Modify  the  image  such that any pixel sample with an intensity
3949              value greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum  inten‐
3950              sity  (white),  or  otherwise  is assigned the minimum intensity
3951              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3952              percentage of the available range.
3953
3954              To  efficiently  create  a  black  and  white image from a color
3955              image, use
3956
3957                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
3958
3959
3960              The optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the  image.
3961              In  order  to  threshold  individual channels, use the -operator
3962              subcommand with it's Threshold, Threshold-White,  or  Threshold-
3963              Black options.
3964
3965       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3966              resize an image (quickly)
3967
3968              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
3969              with more  concern  for  speed  than  resulting  image  quality.
3970              Regardless,  resulting  image  quality  should be acceptable for
3971              many uses.  It is primarily intended  to  be  used  to  generate
3972              smaller  versions  of the image, but may also be used to enlarge
3973              the image.  The -thumbnail geometry argument observes  the  same
3974              syntax and rules as it does for -resize.
3975
3976       -tile <filename>
3977              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
3978
3979       -tile <geometry>
3980              layout of images [montage]
3981
3982       -title <string>
3983              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
3984
3985              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
3986              assigned to the image window and is typically displayed  in  the
3987              window  title  bar.   Optionally you can include the image file‐
3988              name, type, width, height, Exif data, or other  image  attribute
3989              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
3990              mat option.
3991
3992              For example,
3993
3994                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
3995
3996
3997              produces an image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
3998              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
3999
4000       -transform
4001              transform the image
4002
4003              This  option  applies  the transformation matrix from a previous
4004              -affine option.
4005
4006                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4007
4008
4009       -transparent <color>
4010              make this color transparent within the image
4011
4012              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
4013              -fill option.
4014
4015       -treedepth <value>
4016              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4017
4018              Normally,  this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero or
4019              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4020              tion algorithm
4021
4022              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4023              source image with the fastest computational speed and the  least
4024              amount  of  memory.  However, the default depth is inappropriate
4025              for some images. To assure the best representation,  try  values
4026              between  2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for more
4027              details.
4028
4029              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4030              which  requires  color reduction, is required for this option to
4031              take effect.
4032
4033       -trim  trim an image
4034
4035              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4036              the  corner  pixels.   Use -fuzz to make -trim remove edges that
4037              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4038
4039       -type <type>
4040              the image type
4041
4042              Choose from: Bilevel, Grayscale,  Palette,  PaletteMatte,  True‐
4043              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4044              Optimize.
4045
4046              Normally, when a format supports different  subformats  such  as
4047              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4048              encoder will try to choose a suitable  subformat  based  on  the
4049              nature  of the image. The -type option may be used to tailor the
4050              output subformat. By default the output subformat  is  based  on
4051              readily  available  image  information and is usually similar to
4052              the input format.
4053
4054              Specify -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all  pixels
4055              (if  necessary)  in  order to find the most efficient subformat.
4056              Inspecting all of the pixels may be slow for very large  images,
4057              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4058              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4059              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4060              grayscale!
4061
4062              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4063              a  JPEG  image to be written in TrueColor RGB format even though
4064              only gray pixels are present, use
4065
4066                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4067
4068
4069              Similarly, using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder  to
4070              write  an  alpha channel even though the image is opaque, if the
4071              output format supports transparency.
4072
4073              Some pseudo-formats  (e.g.  the  XC  format)  will  respect  the
4074              requested type if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4075              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4076              than PsuedoClass, use
4077
4078                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4079
4080
4081              Likewise,  specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or True‐
4082              ColorMatte prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in  order
4083              to  influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns. Reading
4084              performance will be dramatically improved for black/white  Post‐
4085              script  if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably faster
4086              if Grayscale is specified.
4087
4088       -update <seconds>
4089               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4090
4091              Suppose that while you are displaying an image the file that  is
4092              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4093              detect that the input file has been changed and update the  dis‐
4094              played image accordingly.
4095
4096       -units <type>
4097              the units of image resolution
4098
4099              Choose  from:  Undefined, PixelsPerInch, or PixelsPerCentimeter.
4100              This option is normally used in conjunction  with  the  -density
4101              option.
4102
4103       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4104              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4105
4106              The  -unsharp  option  sharpens an image. The image is convolved
4107              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4108              tion  (sigma).  For  reasonable results, radius should be larger
4109              than sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a  suit‐
4110              able radius.
4111
4112              The parameters are:
4113
4114
4115               radius
4116
4117
4118                    The  radius  of  the Gaussian, in pixels, not counting the
4119                    center pixel (default 0).
4120
4121               sigma
4122
4123
4124                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4125                    1.0).
4126
4127               amount
4128
4129
4130                    The  percentage of the difference between the original and
4131                    the blur image  that  is  added  back  into  the  original
4132                    (default 1.0).
4133
4134               threshold
4135
4136
4137                    The  threshold,  as  a fraction of MaxRGB, needed to apply
4138                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143       -use-pixmap
4144              use the pixmap
4145
4146       -verbose
4147              print detailed information about the image
4148
4149              This information is printed: image  scene  number;  image  name;
4150              image  size;  the  image class (DirectClass or PseudoClass); the
4151              total number of unique colors; and the number of seconds to read
4152              and  transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the total
4153              number of unique colors is  not  displayed  unless  -verbose  is
4154              specified  twice since it may take quite a long time to compute,
4155              particularly for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass  then
4156              its  pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the image
4157              is DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and  indepen‐
4158              dent color specification.
4159
4160              If  -colors  is  also  specified, the total unique colors in the
4161              image and color reduction error values  are  printed.  Refer  to
4162              quantize for a description of these values.
4163
4164       -version
4165              print GraphicsMagick version string
4166
4167       -view <string>
4168              FlashPix viewing parameters
4169
4170       -virtual-pixel <method>
4171              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4172
4173              This  option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations that
4174              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4175
4176              Choose from these methods:
4177
4178
4179               Constant
4180
4181
4182                    Use the image background color.
4183
4184               Edge
4185
4186
4187                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4188
4189               Mirror
4190
4191
4192                    Mirror the image.
4193
4194               Tile
4195
4196
4197                    Tile the image.
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202               This option affects operations that use virtual pixels such  as
4203               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4204
4205       -visual <type>
4206              animate images using this X visual type
4207
4208              Choose from these visual classes:
4209
4210                   StaticGray
4211                   GrayScale
4212                   StaticColor
4213                   PseudoColor
4214                   TrueColor
4215                   DirectColor
4216                   default
4217                   visual id
4218
4219
4220              The  X  server  must support the visual you choose, otherwise an
4221              error occurs.  If a visual is not specified,  the  visual  class
4222              that  can  display  the  most simultaneous colors on the default
4223              screen is chosen.
4224
4225       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4226              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4227
4228       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4229              alter an image along a sine wave
4230
4231              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4232
4233       -white-point <x>,<y>
4234              chromaticity white point
4235
4236       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4237              pixels above the threshold become white
4238
4239              Use -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the  speci‐
4240              fied  threshold  to  maximum value (white). If only one value is
4241              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4242              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
4243              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
4244              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
4245              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4246              a  channel  later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%) symbol is
4247              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
4248              range.
4249
4250       -window <id>
4251              make image the background of a window
4252
4253              id  can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's root
4254              window as the target window.
4255
4256              By default the image is tiled onto the background of the  target
4257              window.    If  backdrop or -geometry are specified, the image is
4258              surrounded by the background color.  Refer to  X  RESOURCES  for
4259              details.
4260
4261              The  image  will not display on the root window if the image has
4262              more unique colors than the target window colormap allows.   Use
4263              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4264
4265       -window-group
4266              specify the window group
4267
4268       -write <filename>
4269              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4270
4271              The  current image is written to the specified filename and then
4272              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4273              ple  of  how  several  sizes of an image may be generated in one
4274              command (repeat as often as needed):
4275
4276                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4277                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4278
4279
4280       -write <filename>
4281              write the image to a file [display]
4282
4283              If filename already exists, you will be prompted as  to  whether
4284              it should be overwritten.
4285
4286              By  default, the image is written in the format that it was read
4287              in as.  To specify a particular image  format,  prefix  filename
4288              with  the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify the
4289              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4290              as  -  for standard output. If file has the extension .Z or .gz,
4291              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4292              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4293
4294              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4295
4296              The  equivalent  X  resource  for  this  option is writeFilename
4297              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4298

ENVIRONMENT

4300       COLUMNS
4301              Output screen width. Used when formatting text for  the  screen.
4302              Many  Unix  systems  keep this shell variable up to date, but it
4303              may need to be explicitly exported in order  for  GraphicsMagick
4304              to see it.
4305
4306       DISPLAY
4307              X11  display  ID  (host,  display number, and screen in the form
4308              hostname:display.screen).
4309
4310       HOME   Location of user's home directory. GraphicsMagick  searches  for
4311              configuration  files  in  $HOME/.magick if the directory exists.
4312              See MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH,  MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and  MAG‐
4313              ICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH if more flexibility is needed.
4314
4315       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4316              When  set  to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled by -moni‐
4317              tor) will also show files accessed (including  temporary  files)
4318              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4319              debugging, but also illustrates arguments made available  to  an
4320              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4321              C library function.
4322
4323       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4324              The minimum coder stability level before it will  be  used.  The
4325              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4326              default minimum level is UNSTABLE, which means that  all  avail‐
4327              able  working coders will be used. The purpose of this option is
4328              to reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due  to
4329              the  huge  number  of  formats  supported. Coders at the PRIMARY
4330              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4331              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4332              tained but represent less used formats. Coders at  the  UNSTABLE
4333              level  either  have weak implementations, the file format itself
4334              is weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is  vanish‐
4335              ingly  small.  Coders at the BROKEN level are known to often not
4336              work properly or might not be useful in their current  state  at
4337              all.
4338
4339       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4340              Search  path  to  use when searching for image format coder mod‐
4341              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4342              formats  supported  by GraphicsMagick by adding loadable modules
4343              to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying  them  into  the
4344              GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  The  formatting of the
4345              search path is similar to operating system  search  paths  (i.e.
4346              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4347              Windows). This user specified search path is used before  trying
4348              the default search path.
4349
4350       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4351              Search  path  to  use  when  searching  for configuration (.mgk)
4352              files.  The formatting of the search path is similar to  operat‐
4353              ing  system  search  paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and
4354              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4355              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4356
4357       MAGICK_DEBUG
4358              Debug  options  (see -debug for details).  Setting debug options
4359              via an environment variable is currently necessary  to  see  the
4360              complete initialization process.
4361
4362       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4363              Search  path  to  use  when searching for filter process modules
4364              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4365              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4366              loadable modules to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying
4367              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4368              ting of the search path is similar to  operating  system  search
4369              paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited
4370              for Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is  used
4371              before trying the default search path.
4372
4373       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4374              For  Microsoft  Windows,  specify  the  path  to the Ghostscript
4375              installation rather than searching for it via the  Windows  reg‐
4376              istry.   This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via the
4377              Ghostscript Windows installer or the  user  wants  more  control
4378              over the Ghostscript used.
4379
4380       MAGICK_HOME
4381              Path  to  top  of  GraphicsMagick  installation  directory. Only
4382              observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do  not
4383              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4384
4385       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4386              If  MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will attempt
4387              to memory-map the input file for reading. This usually  substan‐
4388              tially  improves  repeated  read  performance  since the file is
4389              already in memory after the first time it has  been  read.  How‐
4390              ever,  testing  shows  that performance may be reduced for files
4391              accessed for the first time since data  is  accessed  via  page-
4392              faults (upon first access) and many operating systems fail to do
4393              sequential read-ahead of memory mapped files,  and  particularly
4394              if those files are accessed over a network.  If many large input
4395              files are read, then enabling this option may  harm  performance
4396              by overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs
4397              to free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4398
4399       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4400              If MAGICK_IO_FSYNC is set  to  TRUE,  then  GraphicsMagick  will
4401              request  that  the output file is fully flushed and synchronized
4402              to disk when it is closed. This incurs  a  performance  penalty,
4403              but  has  the  benefit  that  if  the  power fails or the system
4404              crashes, the file should be valid on disk. If  image  files  are
4405              referenced  from  a database, then this option helps assure that
4406              the files referenced by the database are valid.
4407
4408       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4409              The amount of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when  reading  and
4410              writing  encoded  files. The default is 16384, which is observed
4411              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4412              tem  is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g. 4096,
4413              8192, or even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize  the  number
4414              of  physical  disk  I/O  operations.   I/O  performance to files
4415              accessed over a network may benefit significantly by tuning this
4416              option.  Larger  values  are not necessarily better (they may be
4417              slower!), and there is rarely  any  benefit  from  using  values
4418              larger  than  32768.  Use  convert's -verbose option in order to
4419              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4420              in  mind  that  the  operating system will try to cache files in
4421              RAM.
4422
4423       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4424              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4425
4426       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4427              Maximum number of open files.
4428
4429       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4430              Maximum size of a  memory  mapped  file  allocation.   A  memory
4431              mapped  file consumes memory when the file is accessed, although
4432              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4433
4434       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4435              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4436
4437       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4438              Maximum number of total pixels (image rows times  image  colums)
4439              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4440              This is useful to place a limit on how large an  image  may  be.
4441              If  the  input  image  file has image dimensions larger than the
4442              pixel limit, then the image memory allocation is denied  and  an
4443              error  is  returned  immediately.  This is a per-image limit and
4444              does not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple  image
4445              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4446
4447       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4448              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4449
4450       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4451              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4452
4453       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4454              Path  to  directory  where GraphicsMagick should write temporary
4455              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4456              set by TMPDIR.
4457
4458       TMPDIR For  POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to the
4459              directory where all applications should write  temporary  files.
4460              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4461
4462       TMP or TEMP
4463              For  Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where applica‐
4464              tions should write temporary files. Overridden by  MAGICK_TMPDIR
4465              if it is set.
4466
4467       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4468              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4469              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4470              threads  to use to the number of processor cores available while
4471              others default to just one thread. See the OpenMP  specification
4472              for  other  standard  adjustments and your compiler's manual for
4473              vendor-specific settings.
4474

CONFIGURATION FILES

4476       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4477
4478       colors.mgk
4479              colors configuration file
4480
4481                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4482                <colormap>
4483                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4484                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4485                </colormap>
4486
4487
4488       delegates.mgk
4489              delegates configuration file
4490
4491       log.mgk
4492              logging configuration file
4493
4494                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4495                <magicklog>
4496                  <log events="None" />
4497                  <log output="stdout" />
4498                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4499                  <log generations="3" />
4500                  <log limit="2000" />
4501                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4502                </magicklog>
4503
4504
4505       modules.mgk
4506              loadable modules configuration file
4507
4508                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4509                <modulemap>
4510                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4511                </modulemap>
4512
4513
4514       type.mgk
4515              master type (fonts) configuration file
4516
4517                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4518                <typemap>
4519                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4520                  <type
4521                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4522                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4523                    family="AvantGarde"
4524                    foundry="URW"
4525                    weight="400"
4526                    style="normal"
4527                    stretch="normal"
4528                    format="type1"
4529                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4530                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4531                  />
4532                </typemap>
4533
4534

GM ANIMATE

4536       Animate displays a sequence of images on any workstation  display  run‐
4537       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4538       the workstation. If the number of unique colors in  an  image  is  less
4539       than  or  equal to the number the workstation can support, the image is
4540       displayed in an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in  the  image
4541       is  first  reduced  to  match  the  color resolution of the workstation
4542       before it is displayed.
4543
4544       This means that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image  can  display
4545       on  a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most instances
4546       the reduced color image closely resembles the original.  Alternatively,
4547       a  monochrome  or pseudo-color image sequence can display on a continu‐
4548       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4549
4550       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4551       animate  creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can be
4552       rather time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing  the
4553       colors  in  the  image  before you "animate" them. Use mogrify to color
4554       reduce the images to a single colormap.  See  mogrify(1)  for  details.
4555       Alternatively, you can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4556       true color visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap  with  xstdcmap.
4557       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4558       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4559

EXAMPLES

4561       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4562
4563           gm animate cockatoo.*
4564
4565
4566       To animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard  Colormap
4567       best, use:
4568
4569           xstdcmap -best
4570           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4571
4572
4573       To  animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
4574       drop, use:
4575
4576
4577           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4578
4579

OPTIONS

4581       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4582
4583
4584       -authenticate <string>
4585              decrypt image with this password
4586
4587       -backdrop
4588              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4589
4590       -background <color>
4591              the background color
4592
4593       -bordercolor <color>
4594              the border color
4595
4596       -borderwidth <geometry>
4597              the border width
4598
4599       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4600              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4601
4602       -colormap <type>
4603              define the colormap type
4604
4605       -colors <value>
4606              preferred number of colors in the image
4607
4608       -colorspace <value>
4609              the type of colorspace
4610
4611       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4612              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4613
4614       -debug <events>
4615              enable debug printout
4616
4617       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4618              add coder/decoder specific options
4619
4620       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4621              display the next image after pausing
4622
4623       -density <width>x<height>
4624              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4625
4626       -depth <value>
4627              depth of the image
4628
4629       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4630              specifies the X server to contact
4631
4632       -dispose <method>
4633              GIF disposal method
4634
4635       -dither
4636              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4637
4638       -font <name>
4639              use this font when annotating the image with text
4640
4641       -foreground <color>
4642              define the foreground color
4643
4644       -gamma <value>
4645              level of gamma correction
4646
4647       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4648              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4649
4650       -help  print usage instructions
4651
4652       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4653              specify the icon geometry
4654
4655       -iconic
4656              iconic animation
4657
4658       -interlace <type>
4659              the type of interlacing scheme
4660
4661       -limit <type> <value>
4662              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
4663              resource limit
4664
4665       -log <string>
4666              Specify format for debug log
4667
4668       -map <type>
4669              display image using this type.
4670
4671       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4672
4673       -mattecolor <color>
4674              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4675
4676       -monitor
4677              show progress indication
4678
4679       -monochrome
4680              transform the image to black and white
4681
4682       -name  name an image
4683
4684       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4685
4686       -pause <seconds>
4687              pause between animation loops [animate]
4688
4689       -remote
4690              perform a X11 remote operation
4691
4692       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4693              rotate the image
4694
4695       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4696              chroma subsampling factors
4697
4698       -scenes <value-value>
4699              range of image scene numbers to read
4700
4701       -shared-memory
4702              use shared memory
4703
4704       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4705              width and height of the image
4706
4707       -text-font <name>
4708              font for writing fixed-width text
4709
4710       -title <string>
4711              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4712
4713       -treedepth <value>
4714              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4715
4716       -trim  trim an image
4717
4718       -type <type>
4719              the image type
4720
4721       -verbose
4722              print detailed information about the image
4723
4724       -version
4725              print GraphicsMagick version string
4726
4727       -visual <type>
4728              animate images using this X visual type
4729
4730       -window <id>
4731              make image the background of a window
4732
4733              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
4734              above.
4735
4736
4737              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4738              the  group of images following it, until the group is terminated
4739              by the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to  ani‐
4740              mate  three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an
4741              unlimited number of colors, and the third with only  16  colors,
4742              use:
4743
4744
4745                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4746                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4747
4748
4749              Animate  options  can  appear  on  the command line or in your X
4750              resources file. See X(1). Options on the command line  supersede
4751              values  specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames may
4752              appear in any order on the command line if the image  format  is
4753              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4754              image. Otherwise the images  will  display  in  the  order  they
4755              appear on the command line.
4756

MOUSE BUTTONS

4758       Press  any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next sec‐
4759       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4760

COMMAND WIDGET

4762       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4763
4764           Animate
4765
4766               Open
4767               Play
4768               Step
4769               Repeat
4770               Auto Reverse
4771
4772           Speed
4773
4774               Faster
4775               Slower
4776
4777           Direction
4778
4779               Forward
4780               Reverse
4781
4782           Image Info
4783           Help
4784           Quit
4785
4786
4787       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
4788       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4789       pointer to the appropriate menu and press a button and drag.  When  you
4790       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
4791       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4792       execute a particular command.
4793

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4795               Ctl+O
4796
4797                    Press to load an image from a file.
4798               space
4799
4800                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4801               <
4802
4803                    Press  to  speed-up  the  display of the images.  Refer to
4804                    -delay for more information.
4805               >
4806
4807                    Press to slow the display of the images.  Refer to  -delay
4808                    for more information.
4809               ?
4810
4811                    Press  to  display information about the image.  Press any
4812                    key or button to erase the information.
4813                    This information is printed: image name;  image size;  and
4814                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4815               F1
4816
4817                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4818               Ctl-q
4819
4820                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4821
4822

X RESOURCES

4824       Animate  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
4825       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
4826       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4827
4828       All  animate  options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, the
4829       animate program uses the following X resources:
4830
4831               background (class Background)
4832
4833
4834                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4835                    background. The default is #ccc.
4836               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4837
4838
4839                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4840                    border. The default is #ccc.
4841               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4842
4843
4844                    Specifies the width in pixels of the Image window  border.
4845                    The default is 2.
4846               font (class Font or FontList)
4847
4848
4849                    Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in normal
4850                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4851               foreground (class Foreground)
4852
4853
4854                    Specifies the preferred color to use for text  within  the
4855                    Image window.  The default is black.
4856               geometry (class geometry)
4857
4858
4859                    Specifies  the  preferred  size  and position of the image
4860                    window. It is not necessarily obeyed by  all  window  man‐
4861                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4862                    negative x offset is measured from the right edge  of  the
4863                    screen  to  the  right  edge of the icon, and a negative y
4864                    offset is measured from the bottom edge of the  screen  to
4865                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4866               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4867
4868
4869                    Specifies  the preferred size and position of the applica‐
4870                    tion when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by  all
4871                    window  managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in the
4872                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4873               iconic (class Iconic)
4874
4875
4876                    This resource indicates that you  would  prefer  that  the
4877                    application's  windows  initially not be visible as if the
4878                    windows had be immediately iconified by you.  Window  man‐
4879                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4880               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4881
4882
4883                    Specify  the  color  of  windows. It is used for the back‐
4884                    grounds of windows, menus, and notices.  A  3D  effect  is
4885                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4886                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4887               name (class Name)
4888
4889
4890                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4891                    the  application  should be found. This resource is useful
4892                    in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of  an
4893                    application,  without resorting to creating links to alter
4894                    the executable file name. The default is  the  application
4895                    name.
4896               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4897
4898
4899                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4900                    shared memory for pixmaps. ImageMagick  must  be  compiled
4901                    with  shared  memory support, and the display must support
4902                    the  MIT-SHM  extension.  Otherwise,  this   resource   is
4903                    ignored. The default is True.
4904               text_font (class textFont)
4905
4906
4907                    Specifies  the  name of the preferred font to use in fixed
4908                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4909                    Courier.
4910               title (class Title)
4911
4912
4913                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4914                    window. This information is sometimes  used  by  a  window
4915                    manager  to  provide  some  sort of header identifying the
4916                    window. The default is the image file name.
4917
4918

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4921       batch executes an arbitary number of the utility  commands  (e.g.  con‐
4922       vert)  in  the form of a simple linear batch script in order to improve
4923       execution efficiency, and/or to allow use as a  subordinate  co-process
4924       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4925

EXAMPLES

4927        To  drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in any
4928       language), have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via  its
4929       standard  input.   Specify  that standard input should be used by using
4930       '-' as the file name.  The following example converts all files  match‐
4931       ing  '*.jpg'  to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90 degrees and
4932       stripping all embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax  is  standard
4933       Unix shell:
4934
4935         for file in *.jpg
4936         do
4937           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4938           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4939           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4940         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4941
4942
4943       We  can  accomplish the same as the previous example by putting all the
4944       commands in a text file and then specifying the name of the  text  file
4945       as the script to execute:
4946
4947         for file in *.jpg
4948         do
4949           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4950           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4951           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4952         done > script.txt
4953         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
4954
4955

OPTIONS

4957       Options  are  processed  from  left to right and must appear before any
4958       filename argument.
4959
4960       -echo on|off
4961              command echo on or off
4962
4963              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
4964              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
4965
4966       -escape unix|windows
4967              Parse using unix or windows syntax
4968
4969              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
4970              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
4971              Specify  unix  to use unix-style command line parsing or windows
4972              for Microsoft Windows command shell style parsing.  The  default
4973              depends  on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows or
4974              for a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft  Windows).
4975              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
4976              and more portable.
4977
4978       -fail text
4979              text to print if a command fails
4980
4981              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
4982              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
4983
4984       -feedback on|off
4985              enable error feedback
4986
4987              Print  text  (see  -pass  and -fail options) feedback after each
4988              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
4989
4990       -help
4991
4992              Prints batch command help.
4993
4994       -pass text
4995              text to print if a command passes
4996
4997              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
4998              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
4999
5000       -prompt text
5001              Prompt text to use for command line
5002
5003              If  no  filename argument was specified, a simple command prompt
5004              appears  where  you  may  enter  GraphicsMagick  commands.   The
5005              default  prompt is GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt to
5006              something else.
5007
5008       -stop-on-error on|off
5009              Specify if command processing stops on error
5010
5011              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5012              error.   Specify  -stop-on-error  on to cause processing to quit
5013              immediately on error.
5014

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5017       benchmark executes an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g.  convert)  for
5018       one  or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports many
5019       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5020       cute  the  benchmark with an increasing number of threads and provide a
5021       report of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If  benchmark
5022       is  used to execute a command without any additional benchmark options,
5023       then the command is run once.
5024

EXAMPLES

5026       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5027
5028           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5029
5030       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5031
5032           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5033             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5034
5035       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5036       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5037
5038           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5039             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5040
5041       To  obtain  a  full  performance  report  with  an increasing number of
5042       threads (1-32 threads, stepping the number  of  threads  by  four  each
5043       time):
5044
5045           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5046             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5047
5048       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5049
5050           threads - number of threads used.
5051           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5052           user - total user time consumed.
5053           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5054           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5055           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5056           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5057           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5058
5059       Please  note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution time
5060       of just one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used  before  timing
5061       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5062       saving modes and that system caches are warmed up.   Most  modern  CPUs
5063       provide  a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g. by
5064       a factor of two) when only one or two cores are  active.   If  the  CPU
5065       grows  excessively  hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it may dial
5066       back its clock rates as a form of thermal  management.   These  factors
5067       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5068       disabled and the CPU does not need to worry about  thermal  management.
5069       The  powertop  utility available under Linux and Solaris provides a way
5070       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5071

OPTIONS

5073        Options are processed from left to right and must  appear  before  any
5074       argument.
5075
5076       -duration duration
5077              duration  to  run benchmark Specify the number of seconds to run
5078              the benchmark. The command  is  executed  repeatedly  until  the
5079              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5080
5081       -help
5082
5083              Prints benchmark command help.
5084
5085       -iterations loops
5086              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5087              run the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until  the
5088              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5089
5090       -rawcsv
5091              Print  results  in CSV format Print results in a comma-separated
5092              value (CSV) format which  is  easy  to  parse  for  plotting  or
5093              importing  into  a spreadsheet or database.  The values reported
5094              are threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5095
5096       -stepthreads step
5097              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5098               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5099              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5100              of threads is taken from the standard  OMP_NUM_THREADS  environ‐
5101              ment variable.
5102

GM COMPARE

5104       compare  compares  two  similar  images  using  a specified statistical
5105       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5106       the  altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see -highlight-
5107       style) and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the  origi‐
5108       nal  image  and  compare-image is the (possibly) altered version, which
5109       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5110

EXAMPLES

5112       To compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical  analy‐
5113       sis use:
5114
5115           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5116
5117
5118       To create an annotated difference image use:
5119
5120           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5121             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5122
5123

OPTIONS

5125       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5126       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5127       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5128
5129       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5130
5131
5132       -authenticate <string>
5133              decrypt image with this password
5134
5135       -colorspace <value>
5136              the type of colorspace
5137
5138       -debug <events>
5139              enable debug printout
5140
5141       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5142              add coder/decoder specific options
5143
5144       -density <width>x<height>
5145              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5146
5147       -depth <value>
5148              depth of the image
5149
5150       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5151              specifies the X server to contact
5152
5153       -endian <type>
5154              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5155
5156       -file <filename>
5157              write annotated difference image to file
5158
5159       -help  print usage instructions
5160
5161       -highlight-color <color>
5162              pixel annotation color
5163
5164       -highlight-style <style>
5165              pixel annotation style
5166
5167       -interlace <type>
5168              the type of interlacing scheme
5169
5170       -limit <type> <value>
5171              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
5172              resource limit
5173
5174       -log <string>
5175              Specify format for debug log
5176
5177       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5178
5179       -maximum-error <limit>
5180              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5181
5182       -metric <metric>
5183              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5184
5185       -monitor
5186              show progress indication
5187
5188       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5189              chroma subsampling factors
5190
5191       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5192              width and height of the image
5193
5194       -type <type>
5195              the image type
5196
5197       -verbose
5198              print detailed information about the image
5199
5200       -version
5201              print GraphicsMagick version string
5202
5203              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5204              above.
5205
5206

GM COMPOSITE

5208       composite  composites  (combines)  images  to create new images.  base-
5209       image is the base image and change-image contains the changes.   ouput-
5210       image  is  the  result,  and  normally has the same dimensions as base-
5211       image.
5212
5213
5214       The optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information  for
5215       change-image  when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A mask
5216       image is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If  mask-
5217       image  is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the resulting
5218       intensities are used as opacity information.
5219

EXAMPLES

5221       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5222
5223           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5224
5225
5226       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5227
5228           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5229                     difference.miff
5230
5231
5232       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting  at  location
5233       (100,150), use:
5234
5235           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5236                     perch.ras composite.miff
5237
5238
5239       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5240
5241           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5242           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5243                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5244
5245
5246       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5247       image, try
5248
5249           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5250                     red-green.png
5251           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5252                     gm composite.png
5253
5254

OPTIONS

5256       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5257       the  command  line  remains  in effect only for the image that follows.
5258       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5259
5260       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5261
5262
5263       -authenticate <string>
5264              decrypt image with this password
5265
5266       -background <color>
5267              the background color
5268
5269       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5270              blue chromaticity primary point
5271
5272       -colors <value>
5273              preferred number of colors in the image
5274
5275       -colorspace <value>
5276              the type of colorspace
5277
5278       -comment <string>
5279              annotate an image with a comment
5280
5281       -compose <operator>
5282              the type of image composition
5283
5284       -compress <type>
5285              the type of image compression
5286
5287       -debug <events>
5288              enable debug printout
5289
5290       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5291              add coder/decoder specific options
5292
5293       -density <width>x<height>
5294              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5295
5296       -depth <value>
5297              depth of the image
5298
5299       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5300              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5301
5302       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5303              specifies the X server to contact
5304
5305       -dispose <method>
5306              GIF disposal method
5307
5308       -dissolve <percent>
5309              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5310
5311       -dither
5312              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5313
5314       -encoding <type>
5315              specify the text encoding
5316
5317       -endian <type>
5318              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5319
5320       -filter <type>
5321              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5322
5323       -font <name>
5324              use this font when annotating the image with text
5325
5326       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5327              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5328
5329       -gravity <type>
5330              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5331
5332       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5333              green chromaticity primary point
5334
5335       -help  print usage instructions
5336
5337       -interlace <type>
5338              the type of interlacing scheme
5339
5340       -label <name>
5341              assign a label to an image
5342
5343       -limit <type> <value>
5344              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
5345              resource limit
5346
5347       -log <string>
5348              Specify format for debug log
5349
5350       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5351
5352       -monitor
5353              show progress indication
5354
5355       -monochrome
5356              transform the image to black and white
5357
5358       -negate
5359              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5360
5361       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5362              size and location of an image canvas
5363
5364       -profile <filename>
5365              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5366
5367       -quality <value>
5368              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5369
5370       -recolor <matrix>
5371              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5372
5373       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5374              red chromaticity primary point
5375
5376       -render
5377              render vector operations
5378
5379       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5380              Adjust image page offsets
5381
5382       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5383              resize an image
5384
5385       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5386              rotate the image
5387
5388       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5389              chroma subsampling factors
5390
5391       -scene <value>
5392              set scene number
5393
5394       -set <attribute> <value>
5395              set an image attribute
5396
5397       +set <attribute>
5398              unset an image attribute
5399
5400       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5401              sharpen the image
5402
5403       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5404              width and height of the image
5405
5406       -stegano <offset>
5407              hide watermark within an image
5408
5409       -stereo
5410              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5411
5412       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5413
5414       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5415              resize an image (quickly)
5416
5417       -treedepth <value>
5418              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5419
5420       -trim  trim an image
5421
5422       -type <type>
5423              the image type
5424
5425       -units <type>
5426              the units of image resolution
5427
5428       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5429              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5430
5431       -verbose
5432              print detailed information about the image
5433
5434       -version
5435              print GraphicsMagick version string
5436
5437       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5438              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5439
5440       -white-point <x>,<y>
5441              chromaticity white point
5442
5443       -write <filename>
5444              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5445
5446              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
5447              above.
5448
5449

GM CONJURE

5451       The Magick scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit  those  that
5452       want  to  accomplish  custom  image processing tasks but do not wish to
5453       program, or those that do not have access to a Perl  interpreter  or  a
5454       compiler.   The  interpreter  is  called conjure and here is an example
5455       script:
5456
5457           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5458           <image size="400x400" >
5459             <read filename="image.gif" />
5460             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5461             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5462             <get width="width" height="height" />
5463             <print output=
5464               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5465                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5466             <write filename="image.png" />
5467           </image>
5468
5469
5470       invoked with
5471
5472           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5473
5474
5475       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5476       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5477

OPTIONS

5479       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5480       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
5481       specifying  the  option  again  with  a  different  effect, or if it is
5482       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5483
5484       You can define your own keyword/value pairs on the command  line.   The
5485       script  can  then use this information when setting values by including
5486       %[keyword] in the string.  For example, if  you  included  "-dimensions
5487       400x400"  on  the  command  line, as illustrated above, then any string
5488       containing  "%[dimensions]"  would  have  400x400   substituted.    The
5489       "%[string]"  can  be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such as geome‐
5490       try="%[dimensions]" or as a part of a string such as  filename="%[base‐
5491       name].png".
5492
5493       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5494       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5495       whose usage is described below.
5496
5497       The  value  can be any string.  If either the keyword or the value con‐
5498       tains white space or any symbols that have  special  meanings  to  your
5499       shell  such  as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in quotation marks
5500       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5501
5502       Keywords and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY"  would
5503       be three different keywords.
5504
5505       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5506
5507
5508       -debug <events>
5509              enable debug printout
5510
5511       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5512              add coder/decoder specific options
5513
5514       -help  print usage instructions
5515
5516       -log <string>
5517              Specify format for debug log
5518
5519       -verbose
5520              print detailed information about the image
5521
5522       -version
5523              print GraphicsMagick version string
5524

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5526       The  Magick  Scripting  Language  (MSL) presently defines the following
5527       elements and their attributes:
5528
5529               <image>
5530
5531                    background, color, id, size
5532
5533                    Define a new image object.  </image> destroys it.  Because
5534                    of  this,  if  you  wish to reference multiple "subimages"
5535                    (aka pages or layers), you can  embed  one  image  element
5536                    inside of another. For example:
5537
5538
5539
5540                        <image>
5541                        <read filename="input.png" />
5542                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5543                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5544                        <image />
5545                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5546                        </image>
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551                        <image size="400x400" />
5552
5553
5554               <group>
5555
5556
5557                    Define  a  new group of image objects.  By default, images
5558                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5559
5560
5561
5562                        <image>   -- creates the image
5563                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5564                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5565
5566
5567
5568                    However, in a group, all images in that  group  will  stay
5569                    around for the life of the group:
5570
5571
5572
5573                        <group>                           -- start a group
5574                            <image>                       -- create an image
5575                            ....                          -- do stuff
5576                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5577                            <image>                        --  create  another
5578                    image
5579                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5580                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5581                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5582                        </group>                          -- dispose  of  both
5583                    images
5584
5585
5586               <read>
5587
5588                        filename
5589
5590                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5591
5592
5593
5594                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5595
5596
5597
5598                    To read two images use
5599
5600
5601
5602                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5603                        <read filename="image.png />
5604
5605
5606               <write>
5607
5608                        filename
5609                    Write  the  image(s) to disk, either as a single multiple-
5610                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5611
5612
5613
5614                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5615
5616               <get>
5617
5618                    Get  any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's   GetAt‐
5619                    tribute()  and  stores  it as an image attribute for later
5620                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5621
5622
5623                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5624                        <print  output="Image  size  is  %[base-width]x%[base-
5625                    height].\n" />
5626
5627
5628               <set>
5629
5630                    background,  bordercolor,  clip-mask, colorspace, density,
5631                    magick, mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute  recognized
5632                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5633               <profile>
5634
5635                        [profilename]
5636
5637                    Read  one  or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles from file
5638                    and assign to image
5639
5640
5641
5642                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5643
5644
5645
5646                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5647
5648
5649
5650                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5651
5652
5653               <border>
5654
5655                        fill, geometry, height, width
5656               <blur>
5657
5658                        radius, sigma
5659               <charcoal>
5660
5661                        radius, sigma
5662               <chop>
5663
5664                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5665               <crop>
5666
5667                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5668               <composite>
5669
5670                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5671
5672
5673                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5674                        <group>
5675                            <image id="image_01">
5676                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5677                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5678                            </image>
5679                            <image id="image_02">
5680                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5681                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5682                            </image>
5683                            <image>
5684                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5685                                <composite       image="image_01"       geome‐
5686                    try="+740+470"/>
5687                                <composite       image="image_02"       geome‐
5688                    try="+390+415"/>
5689                            </image>
5690                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5691                        </group>
5692
5693
5694               <despeckle>
5695
5696               <emboss>
5697
5698                        radius, sigma
5699               <enhance>
5700
5701               <equalize>
5702
5703               <edge>
5704
5705                        radius
5706               <flip>
5707
5708               <flop>
5709
5710               <frame>
5711
5712                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5713               <flatten>
5714
5715               <get>
5716
5717                        height, width
5718               <gamma>
5719
5720                        red, green, blue
5721               <image>
5722
5723                        background, color, id, size
5724               <implode>
5725
5726                        amount
5727               <magnify>
5728
5729               <minify>
5730
5731               <medianfilter>
5732
5733                        radius
5734               <normalize>
5735
5736               <oilpaint>
5737
5738                        radius
5739               <print>
5740
5741                        output
5742               <profile>
5743
5744                        [profilename]
5745               <read>
5746
5747               <resize>
5748
5749                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5750               <roll>
5751
5752                        geometry, x, y
5753               <rotate>
5754
5755                        degrees
5756               <reducenoise>
5757
5758                        radius
5759               <sample>
5760
5761                        geometry, height, width
5762               <scale>
5763
5764                        geometry, height, width
5765               <sharpen>
5766
5767                        radius, sigma
5768               <shave>
5769
5770                        geometry, height, width
5771               <shear>
5772
5773                        x, y
5774               <solarize>
5775
5776                        threshold
5777               <spread>
5778
5779                        radius
5780               <stegano>
5781
5782                        image
5783               <stereo>
5784
5785                        image
5786               <swirl>
5787
5788                        degrees
5789               <texture>
5790
5791                        image
5792               <threshold>
5793
5794                        threshold
5795               <transparent>
5796
5797                        color
5798               <trim>
5799
5800
5801

GM CONVERT

5803       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5804       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5805       cessing can be performed on the converted image during  the  conversion
5806       process.  Convert  recognizes  the image formats listed in GraphicsMag‐
5807       ick(1).
5808
5809

EXAMPLES

5811       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5812
5813           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5814                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5815
5816
5817       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
5818       the  image  is  going  to  be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
5819       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
5820       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5821       the desired dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled  so  its
5822       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
5823       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
5824       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5825
5826       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5827
5828           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5829
5830
5831       To  convert  a  multi-page PostScript document to individual FAX pages,
5832       use:
5833
5834           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5835
5836
5837       To convert a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image  in  the
5838       lower left-hand corner, use:
5839
5840           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5841
5842
5843       To  convert  a  raw  Gray  image  with  a 128 byte header to a portable
5844       graymap, use:
5845
5846           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5847                   image.pgm
5848
5849
5850       In this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and  it
5851       has  the  dimensions  and number of header bytes specified by the -size
5852       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5853       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5854
5855       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5856
5857           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5858           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5859
5860
5861       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5862
5863           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5864
5865
5866       To  annotate  an  image  with  blue  text  using font 12x24 at position
5867       (100,100), use:
5868
5869           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5870                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5871                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5872
5873
5874       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5875
5876           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5877
5878
5879       To surround an icon with an ornamental border to  use  with  Mosaic(1),
5880       use:
5881
5882           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5883                   icon.png
5884
5885
5886       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5887
5888           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5889
5890

OPTIONS

5892       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5893       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
5894       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
5895       Some options only affect the decoding of images  and  others  only  the
5896       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5897
5898       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5899
5900
5901       -adjoin
5902              join images into a single multi-image file
5903
5904       -affine <matrix>
5905              drawing transform matrix
5906
5907       -antialias
5908              remove pixel aliasing
5909
5910       -append
5911              append a set of images
5912
5913        -asc-cdl <spec>
5914              apply ASC CDL color transform
5915
5916       -authenticate <string>
5917              decrypt image with this password
5918
5919       -auto-orient
5920              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5921
5922       -average
5923              average a set of images
5924
5925       -background <color>
5926              the background color
5927
5928       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5929              pixels below the threshold become black
5930
5931       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5932              blue chromaticity primary point
5933
5934       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5935              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5936
5937       -border <width>x<height>
5938              surround the image with a border of color
5939
5940       -bordercolor <color>
5941              the border color
5942
5943       -box <color>
5944              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5945
5946       -channel <type>
5947              the type of channel
5948
5949       -charcoal <factor>
5950              simulate a charcoal drawing
5951
5952       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5953              remove pixels from the interior of an image
5954
5955       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
5956
5957       -coalesce
5958              merge a sequence of images
5959
5960       -colorize <value>
5961              colorize the image with the pen color
5962
5963       -colors <value>
5964              preferred number of colors in the image
5965
5966       -colorspace <value>
5967              the type of colorspace
5968
5969       -comment <string>
5970              annotate an image with a comment
5971
5972       -compose <operator>
5973              the type of image composition
5974
5975       -compress <type>
5976              the type of image compression
5977
5978       -contrast
5979              enhance or reduce the image contrast
5980
5981       -convolve <kernel>
5982              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
5983
5984       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5985              preferred size and location of the cropped image
5986
5987       -cycle <amount>
5988              displace image colormap by amount
5989
5990       -debug <events>
5991              enable debug printout
5992
5993       -deconstruct
5994              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
5995
5996       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5997              add coder/decoder specific options
5998
5999       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6000              display the next image after pausing
6001
6002       -density <width>x<height>
6003              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6004
6005       -depth <value>
6006              depth of the image
6007
6008       -despeckle
6009              reduce the speckles within an image
6010
6011       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6012              specifies the X server to contact
6013
6014       -dispose <method>
6015              GIF disposal method
6016
6017       -dither
6018              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6019
6020       -draw <string>
6021              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6022
6023       -edge <radius>
6024              detect edges within an image
6025
6026       -emboss <radius>
6027              emboss an image
6028
6029       -encoding <type>
6030              specify the text encoding
6031
6032       -endian <type>
6033              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6034
6035       -enhance
6036              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6037
6038       -equalize
6039              perform histogram equalization to the image
6040
6041       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6042              composite image on background color canvas image
6043
6044       -fill <color>
6045              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6046
6047       -filter <type>
6048              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6049
6050       -flatten
6051              flatten a sequence of images
6052
6053       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6054
6055       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6056
6057       -font <name>
6058              use this font when annotating the image with text
6059
6060       -format <string>
6061              output formatted image characteristics
6062
6063       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6064              surround the image with an ornamental border
6065
6066       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6067              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6068
6069       -gamma <value>
6070              level of gamma correction
6071
6072       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6073              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6074
6075       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6076              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6077
6078       -gravity <type>
6079              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6080
6081       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6082              green chromaticity primary point
6083
6084       -hald-clut <clut>
6085              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6086
6087       -help  print usage instructions
6088
6089       -implode <factor>
6090              implode image pixels about the center
6091
6092       -intent <type>
6093              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6094
6095       -interlace <type>
6096              the type of interlacing scheme
6097
6098       -label <name>
6099              assign a label to an image
6100
6101       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6102              perform local adaptive thresholding
6103
6104       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6105              adjust the level of image contrast
6106
6107       -limit <type> <value>
6108              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
6109              resource limit
6110
6111       -list <type>
6112              the type of list
6113
6114       -log <string>
6115              Specify format for debug log
6116
6117       -loop <iterations>
6118              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6119
6120       -magnify
6121              magnify the image
6122
6123       -map <filename>
6124              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6125
6126       -mask <filename>
6127              Specify a clipping mask
6128
6129       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6130
6131       -mattecolor <color>
6132              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6133
6134       -median <radius>
6135              apply a median filter to the image
6136
6137       -minify <factor>
6138              minify the image
6139
6140       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6141              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6142
6143       -monitor
6144              show progress indication
6145
6146       -monochrome
6147              transform the image to black and white
6148
6149       -morph <frames>
6150              morphs an image sequence
6151
6152       -mosaic
6153              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6154
6155       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6156              Simulate motion blur
6157
6158       -negate
6159              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6160
6161       -noise <radius|type>
6162              add or reduce noise in an image
6163
6164       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6165
6166       -normalize
6167              transform image to span the full range of color values
6168
6169       -opaque <color>
6170              change this color to the pen color within the image
6171
6172       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6173              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
6174              channel
6175
6176       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6177              ordered dither the image
6178
6179       -orient <orientation>
6180              Set the image orientation attribute
6181
6182       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6183              size and location of an image canvas
6184
6185       -paint <radius>
6186              simulate an oil painting
6187
6188       -pen <color>
6189              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6190
6191       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6192
6193       -pointsize <value>
6194              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6195
6196       -preview <type>
6197              image preview type
6198
6199       -process <command>
6200              process a sequence of images using a process module
6201
6202       -profile <filename>
6203              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6204
6205       -quality <value>
6206              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6207
6208       -raise <width>x<height>
6209              lighten or darken image edges
6210
6211       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6212              random threshold the image
6213
6214       -recolor <matrix>
6215              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6216
6217       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6218              red chromaticity primary point
6219
6220       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6221              apply options to a portion of the image
6222
6223       -render
6224              render vector operations
6225
6226       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6227              Adjust image page offsets
6228
6229       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6230              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6231
6232       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6233              resize an image
6234
6235       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6236              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6237
6238       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6239              rotate the image
6240
6241       -sample <geometry>
6242              scale image using pixel sampling
6243
6244       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6245              chroma subsampling factors
6246
6247       -scale <geometry>
6248              scale the image.
6249
6250       -scene <value>
6251              set scene number
6252
6253       -set <attribute> <value>
6254              set an image attribute
6255
6256       +set <attribute>
6257              unset an image attribute
6258
6259       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6260              segment an image
6261
6262       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6263              shade the image using a distant light source
6264
6265       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6266              sharpen the image
6267
6268       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6269              shave pixels from the image edges
6270
6271       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6272              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6273
6274       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6275              width and height of the image
6276
6277       -solarize <factor>
6278              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6279
6280       -spread <amount>
6281              displace image pixels by a random amount
6282
6283       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6284
6285       -stroke <color>
6286              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6287
6288       -strokewidth <value>
6289              set the stroke width
6290
6291       -swirl <degrees>
6292              swirl image pixels about the center
6293
6294       -texture <filename>
6295              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6296
6297       -threshold <value>{%}
6298              threshold the image
6299
6300       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6301              resize an image (quickly)
6302
6303       -tile <filename>
6304              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6305
6306       -transform
6307              transform the image
6308
6309       -transparent <color>
6310              make this color transparent within the image
6311
6312       -treedepth <value>
6313              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6314
6315       -trim  trim an image
6316
6317       -type <type>
6318              the image type
6319
6320       -units <type>
6321              the units of image resolution
6322
6323       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6324              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6325
6326       -use-pixmap
6327              use the pixmap
6328
6329       -verbose
6330              print detailed information about the image
6331
6332       -version
6333              print GraphicsMagick version string
6334
6335       -view <string>
6336              FlashPix viewing parameters
6337
6338       -virtual-pixel <method>
6339              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6340
6341       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6342              alter an image along a sine wave
6343
6344       -white-point <x>,<y>
6345              chromaticity white point
6346
6347       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6348              pixels above the threshold become white
6349
6350       -write <filename>
6351              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6352
6353              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6354              above.
6355

GM DISPLAY

6357       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6358       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6359       an X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular  image
6360       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6361
6362       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6363
6364                o  load an image from a file
6365                o  display the next image
6366                o  display the former image
6367                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6368                o  write the image to a file
6369                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6370                o  delete the image file
6371                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6372                o   select  the  image to display by its thumbnail rather than
6373               name
6374                o  undo last image transformation
6375                o  copy a region of the image
6376                o  paste a region to the image
6377                o  restore the image to its original size
6378                o  refresh the image
6379                o  half the image size
6380                o  double the image size
6381                o  resize the image
6382                o  crop the image
6383                o  cut the image
6384                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6385                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6386                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6387                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6388                o  rotate the image
6389                o  shear the image
6390                o  roll the image
6391                o  trim the image edges
6392                o  invert the colors of the image
6393                o  vary the color brightness
6394                o  vary the color saturation
6395                o  vary the image hue
6396                o  gamma correct the image
6397                o  sharpen the image contrast
6398                o  dull the image contrast
6399                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6400                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6401                o  negate the image colors
6402                o  convert the image to grayscale
6403                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6404                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6405                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6406                o  detect edges within the image
6407                o  emboss an image
6408                o  segment the image by color
6409                o  simulate an oil painting
6410                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6411                o  annotate the image with text
6412                o  draw on the image
6413                o  edit an image pixel color
6414                o  edit the image matte information
6415                o  composite an image with another
6416                o  add a border to the image
6417                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6418                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6419                o  display information about the image
6420                o  zoom a portion of the image
6421                o  show a histogram of the image
6422                o  display image to background of a window
6423                o  set user preferences
6424                o  display information about this program
6425                o  discard all images and exit program
6426                o  change the level of magnification
6427                o  display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW)  uniform
6428               resource locator (URL)
6429
6430

EXAMPLES

6432       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
6433       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6434
6435           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6436
6437
6438       To display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
6439       drop, use:
6440
6441           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6442
6443
6444       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6445
6446           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6447
6448
6449       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6450
6451           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6452
6453
6454       To  display  a  MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and 480 pixels in
6455       height with 256 colors, use:
6456
6457           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6458
6459
6460       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6461       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6462
6463           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6464
6465
6466       To display histogram of an image, use:
6467
6468           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6469
6470

OPTIONS

6472       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
6473       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
6474       specifying  the  option  again  with a different effect. For example to
6475       display three images, the first with 32  colors,  the  second  with  an
6476       unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6477
6478           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6479                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6480
6481
6482       Display  options  can appear on the command line or in your X resources
6483       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
6484       in your X resources file.
6485
6486       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6487
6488
6489       -authenticate <string>
6490              decrypt image with this password
6491
6492       -backdrop
6493              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6494
6495       -background <color>
6496              the background color
6497
6498       -border <width>x<height>
6499              surround the image with a border of color
6500
6501       -bordercolor <color>
6502              the border color
6503
6504       -borderwidth <geometry>
6505              the border width
6506
6507       -colormap <type>
6508              define the colormap type
6509
6510       -colors <value>
6511              preferred number of colors in the image
6512
6513       -colorspace <value>
6514              the type of colorspace
6515
6516       -comment <string>
6517              annotate an image with a comment
6518
6519       -compress <type>
6520              the type of image compression
6521
6522       -contrast
6523              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6524
6525       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6526              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6527
6528       -debug <events>
6529              enable debug printout
6530
6531       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6532              add coder/decoder specific options
6533
6534       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6535              display the next image after pausing
6536
6537       -density <width>x<height>
6538              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6539
6540       -depth <value>
6541              depth of the image
6542
6543       -despeckle
6544              reduce the speckles within an image
6545
6546       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6547              specifies the X server to contact
6548
6549       -dispose <method>
6550              GIF disposal method
6551
6552       -dither
6553              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6554
6555       -edge <radius>
6556              detect edges within an image
6557
6558       -endian <type>
6559              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6560
6561       -enhance
6562              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6563
6564       -filter <type>
6565              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6566
6567       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6568
6569       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6570
6571       -font <name>
6572              use this font when annotating the image with text
6573
6574       -foreground <color>
6575              define the foreground color
6576
6577       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6578              surround the image with an ornamental border
6579
6580       -gamma <value>
6581              level of gamma correction
6582
6583       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6584              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6585
6586       -help  print usage instructions
6587
6588       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6589              specify the icon geometry
6590
6591       -iconic
6592              iconic animation
6593
6594       -immutable
6595              make image immutable
6596
6597       -interlace <type>
6598              the type of interlacing scheme
6599
6600       -label <name>
6601              assign a label to an image
6602
6603       -limit <type> <value>
6604              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
6605              resource limit
6606
6607       -log <string>
6608              Specify format for debug log
6609
6610       -magnify <factor>
6611              magnify the image
6612
6613       -map <type>
6614              display image using this type.
6615
6616       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6617
6618       -mattecolor <color>
6619              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6620
6621       -monitor
6622              show progress indication
6623
6624       -monochrome
6625              transform the image to black and white
6626
6627       -name  name an image
6628
6629       -negate
6630              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6631
6632       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6633
6634       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6635              size and location of an image canvas
6636
6637       +progress
6638              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6639
6640       -quality <value>
6641              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6642
6643       -raise <width>x<height>
6644              lighten or darken image edges
6645
6646       -remote
6647              perform a X11 remote operation
6648
6649       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6650              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6651
6652       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6653              rotate the image
6654
6655       -sample <geometry>
6656              scale image using pixel sampling
6657
6658       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6659              chroma subsampling factors
6660
6661       -scenes <value-value>
6662              range of image scene numbers to read
6663
6664       -set <attribute> <value>
6665              set an image attribute
6666
6667       +set <attribute>
6668              unset an image attribute
6669
6670       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6671              segment an image
6672
6673       -shared-memory
6674              use shared memory
6675
6676       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6677              sharpen the image
6678
6679       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6680              width and height of the image
6681
6682       -text-font <name>
6683              font for writing fixed-width text
6684
6685       -texture <filename>
6686              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6687
6688       -title <string>
6689              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6690
6691       -treedepth <value>
6692              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6693
6694       -trim  trim an image
6695
6696       -type <type>
6697              the image type
6698
6699       -update <seconds>
6700               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6701
6702       -use-pixmap
6703              use the pixmap
6704
6705       -verbose
6706              print detailed information about the image
6707
6708       -version
6709              print GraphicsMagick version string
6710
6711       -visual <type>
6712              animate images using this X visual type
6713
6714       -window <id>
6715              make image the background of a window
6716
6717       -window-group
6718              specify the window group
6719
6720       -write <filename>
6721              write the image to a file [display]
6722
6723              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6724              above.
6725
6726

MOUSE BUTTONS

6728       The  effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons are
6729       required. If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are  returned.
6730       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6731
6732       1        Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See the
6733              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6734
6735       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6736
6737       3       Press and drag to choose from a select set of  display(1)  com‐
6738              mands.  This  button behaves differently if the image being dis‐
6739              played is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile  of
6740              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6741              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6742
6743                  Open
6744                  Next
6745                  Former
6746                  Delete
6747                  Update
6748
6749
6750              If you choose Open, the image represented by the  tile  is  dis‐
6751              played.   To  return  to the visual image directory, choose Next
6752              from the Command widget (refer to  Command  Widget).   Next  and
6753              Former  moves  to  the next or former image respectively. Choose
6754              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6755              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6756              See montage and miff for more details.
6757

COMMAND WIDGET

6759       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6760
6761           File
6762
6763           Open...
6764           Next
6765           Former
6766           Select...
6767           Save...
6768           Print...
6769           Delete...
6770           Canvas...
6771           Visual Directory...
6772           Quit
6773
6774
6775
6776           Edit
6777
6778           Undo
6779           Redo
6780           Cut
6781           Copy
6782           Paste
6783
6784
6785
6786           View
6787
6788           Half Size
6789           Original Size
6790           Double Size
6791           Resize...
6792           Apply
6793           Refresh
6794           Restore
6795
6796
6797
6798           Transform
6799
6800           Crop
6801           Chop
6802           Flop
6803           Flip
6804           Rotate Right
6805           Rotate Left
6806           Rotate...
6807           Shear...
6808           Roll...
6809           Trim Edges
6810
6811
6812
6813           Enhance
6814
6815           Hue...
6816           Saturation...
6817           Brightness...
6818           Gamma...
6819           Spiff...
6820           Dull
6821           Equalize
6822           Normalize
6823           Negate
6824           GRAYscale
6825           Quantize...
6826
6827
6828
6829           Effects
6830
6831           Despeckle
6832           Emboss
6833           Reduce Noise
6834           Add Noise
6835           Sharpen...
6836           Blur...
6837           Threshold...
6838           Edge Detect...
6839           Spread...
6840           Shade...
6841           Raise...
6842           Segment...
6843
6844
6845
6846           F/X
6847
6848           Solarize...
6849           Swirl...
6850           Implode...
6851           Wave...
6852           Oil Paint...
6853           Charcoal Draw...
6854
6855
6856
6857           Image Edit
6858
6859           Annotate...
6860           Draw...
6861           Color...
6862           Matte...
6863           Composite...
6864           Add Border...
6865           Add Frame...
6866           Comment...
6867           Launch...
6868           Region of Interest...
6869
6870
6871
6872           Miscellany
6873
6874           Image Info
6875           Zoom Image
6876           Show Preview...
6877           Show Histogram
6878           Show Matte
6879           Background...
6880           Slide Show
6881           Preferences...
6882
6883
6884
6885           Help
6886
6887           Overview
6888           Browse Documentation
6889           About Display
6890
6891
6892
6893       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
6894       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6895       pointer to the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag.  When  you
6896       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
6897       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6898       execute a particular command.
6899

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6901       Accelerators  are  one or two key presses that effect a particular com‐
6902       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6903
6904           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6905           space     Press to display the next image.
6906
6907
6908       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6909       you  can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6910       ber.  For example to display the fourth page beyond the  current  page,
6911       press 4space.
6912
6913           backspace Press to display the former image.
6914
6915
6916       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6917       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6918       ber.   For  example  to  display  the fourth page preceding the current
6919       page, press 4n.
6920
6921           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6922           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6923                    PostScript printer.
6924           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6925           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6926           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6927           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6928           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6929           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6930                    the image.
6931           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6932                    the image.
6933           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6934                    the image.
6935           <        Press to halve the image size.
6936           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6937           >        Press to double the image size.
6938           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6939                    you specify.
6940           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6941                    permanent.
6942                    By default, any image size transformations are
6943                    applied to the original image to create the
6944                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6945                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6946                    original image does not change size only the
6947                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6948                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
6949                    the original image will in fact remain the same
6950                    size.  To force the original image to double in
6951                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
6952           @        Press to refresh the image window.
6953           C        Press to crop the image.
6954           [        Press to chop the image.
6955           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
6956           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
6957           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
6958           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
6959                    counter-clockwise.
6960           *        Press to rotate the image
6961                    the number of degrees you specify.
6962           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
6963                    you specify.
6964           R        Press to roll the image.
6965           T        Press to trim the image edges.
6966           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
6967           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
6968           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
6969           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
6970           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
6971           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
6972           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
6973                    the image.
6974           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
6975                    the image.
6976           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
6977           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
6978           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
6979                    colors in the image.
6980           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
6981           F2       Press to emboss an image.
6982           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
6983           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
6984           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
6985           F7       Press to blur image an image.
6986           F8       Press to threshold the image.
6987           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
6988           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
6989           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
6990                    source.
6991           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
6992                    create a 3-D effect.
6993           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
6994           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
6995           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
6996           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
6997           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
6998           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
6999           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
7000                    with another.
7001           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
7002           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
7003           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
7004           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
7005           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
7006           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
7007           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
7008           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
7009           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
7010                    region of interest.
7011           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
7012           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
7013           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
7014                    or f/x.
7015           F1       Press to display helpful information about
7016                    the "display" utility.
7017           Find     Press to browse documentation about
7018                    GraphicsMagick.
7019           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
7020
7021
7022       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
7023       within  the  magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify window by
7024       pressing button 2.
7025
7026       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7027       of the image.
7028

X RESOURCES

7030       Display  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
7031       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
7032       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7033
7034       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7035       play uses the following X resources:
7036
7037       background (class Background)
7038               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7039              ground. The default is #ccc.
7040
7041       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7042                Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window bor‐
7043              der. The default is #ccc.
7044
7045       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7046               Specifies the width in pixels of the image window  border.  The
7047              default is 2.
7048
7049       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7050                Specifies  the  name  of the preferred browser when displaying
7051              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7052
7053       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7054               Display pops up a dialog box to  confirm  exiting  the  program
7055              when  exiting  the  program.  Set this resource to False to exit
7056              without a confirmation.
7057
7058       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7059               Specifies the gamma of the X server.  You  can  apply  separate
7060              gamma  values  to the red, green, and blue channels of the image
7061              with  a  gamma  value  list  delineated   with   slashes   (i.e.
7062              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7063
7064       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7065               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7066              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7067
7068       font (class FontList)
7069               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal  for‐
7070              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7071
7072       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7073               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7074              the image window with text. The default fonts are  fixed,  vari‐
7075              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7076
7077       foreground (class Foreground)
7078                Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the image
7079              window.  The default is black.
7080
7081       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7082               This resource, if true, will lighten  or  darken  an  image  of
7083              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7084              playGamma). The default is True.
7085
7086       geometry (class Geometry)
7087               Specifies the preferred size and position of the image  window.
7088              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7089
7090              Offsets,  if  present,  are handled in X(1) style.  A negative x
7091              offset is measured from the right edge  of  the  screen  to  the
7092              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7093              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7094
7095       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7096               Specifies the preferred size and position  of  the  application
7097              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7098              agers.
7099
7100              Offsets, if present, are handled in the same manner as in  class
7101              Geometry.
7102
7103       iconic (class Iconic)
7104               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7105              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7106              immediately  iconified by you. Window managers may choose not to
7107              honor the application's request.
7108
7109       magnify (class Magnify)
7110               specifies an integral factor  by  which  the  image  should  be
7111              enlarged.  The default is 3.  This value only affects the magni‐
7112              fication window which is invoked with button number 3 after  the
7113              image is displayed.
7114
7115       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7116               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7117              windows, menus, and notices. A 3D effect is  achieved  by  using
7118              highlight  and  shadow  colors  derived from this color. Default
7119              value: #697B8F.
7120
7121       name (class Name)
7122               This resource specifies the name under which resources for  the
7123              application  should  be  found. This resource is useful in shell
7124              aliases to distinguish between invocations  of  an  application,
7125              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7126              name. The default is the application name.
7127
7128       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7129               Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when  annotat‐
7130              ing  the  image  window with text. The default colors are black,
7131              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7132
7133       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7134               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7135              it  is  the command to print PostScript to your printer. Default
7136              value: lp -c -s %i.
7137
7138       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7139               This resource specifies  whether  display  should  attempt  use
7140              shared  memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
7141              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
7142              extension.  Otherwise,  this resource is ignored. The default is
7143              True.
7144
7145       textFont (class textFont)
7146               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7147              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7148
7149       title (class Title)
7150               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7151              dow. This information is sometimes used by a window  manager  to
7152              provide  a  header  identifying  the  window. The default is the
7153              image file name.
7154
7155       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7156               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7157              cache.   Each  time you modify the image it is saved in the undo
7158              edit cache as long as memory is available. You can  subsequently
7159              undo  one  or  more  of these transformations. The default is 16
7160              Megabytes.
7161
7162       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7163               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7164              to  True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is use‐
7165              ful if your image exceeds the dimensions of your  server  screen
7166              and  you  intend  to  pan the image. Panning is much faster with
7167              Pixmaps than with a XImage. Pixmaps are  considered  a  precious
7168              resource, use them with discretion.
7169
7170              To  set  the  geometry  of the Magnify or Pan or window, use the
7171              geometry resource.  For example, to set the Pan window  geometry
7172              to 256x256, use:
7173
7174                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7175
7176

IMAGE LOADING

7178       To  select  an  image to display, choose Open of the File sub-menu from
7179       the Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a  particu‐
7180       lar  image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any button.
7181       The filename is copied to the text window. Next, press  Open  or  press
7182       the  RETURN  key.  Alternatively,  you  can  type  the  image file name
7183       directly into the text window. To descend directories, choose a  direc‐
7184       tory  name  and  press  the  button twice quickly. A scrollbar allows a
7185       large list of filenames to be moved through  the  viewing  area  if  it
7186       exceeds the size of the list area.
7187
7188       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7189       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7190
7191       To select your image from the X server screen instead of from  a  file,
7192       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7193

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7195       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7196       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7197       ate  a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current direc‐
7198       tory, press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you  can
7199       select  a  set  of  image names by using shell globbing characters. For
7200       example, type *.jpg to include  only  files  that  end  with  .jpg.  To
7201       descend directories, choose a directory name and press the button twice
7202       quickly. A scrollbar allows a large  list  of  filenames  to  be  moved
7203       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7204
7205       After  you  select  a set of files, they are turned into thumbnails and
7206       tiled onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular  thumb‐
7207       nail  and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image rep‐
7208       resented by the thumbnail is displayed at its full  size.  Choose  Next
7209       from  the  File  sub-menu of the Command widget to return to the Visual
7210       Image Directory.
7211

IMAGE CUTTING

7213       Note that cut information for image window is  not  retained  for  col‐
7214       ormapped  X  server  visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor, GRAYScale,
7215       PseudoColor).  Correct cutting behavior  may  require  a  TrueColor  or
7216       DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7217
7218       To  begin,  press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7219       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7220
7221       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7222       window.  You  are  now in cut mode. In cut mode, the Command widget has
7223       these options:
7224
7225           Help
7226           Dismiss
7227
7228
7229       To define a cut region, press button 1 and  drag.  The  cut  region  is
7230       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7231       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut  region,  release
7232       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7233       widget has these options:
7234
7235           Cut
7236           Help
7237           Dismiss
7238
7239
7240       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the  cut  rec‐
7241       tangle  corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut to
7242       commit your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press  Dis‐
7243       miss.
7244

IMAGE COPYING

7246       To  begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7247       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7248
7249       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7250       window.  You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget has
7251       these options:
7252
7253           Help
7254           Dismiss
7255
7256
7257       To define a copy region, press button 1 and drag. The  copy  region  is
7258       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7259       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region,  release
7260       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7261       widget has these options:
7262
7263           Copy
7264           Help
7265           Dismiss
7266
7267
7268       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy  rec‐
7269       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7270       commit your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press  Dis‐
7271       miss.
7272

IMAGE PASTING

7274       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7275       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7276
7277       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7278       window.  You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7279       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7280
7281           Operators
7282
7283           over
7284           in
7285           out
7286           atop
7287           xor
7288           plus
7289           minus
7290           add
7291           subtract
7292           difference
7293           multiply
7294           bumpmap
7295           replace
7296
7297           Help
7298           Dismiss
7299
7300
7301       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7302       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7303       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7304       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7305
7306       over     The  result  is  the union of the two image shapes, with image
7307              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7308
7309       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7310              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7311
7312       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7313              out.
7314
7315       atop    The result is the  same  shape  as  image  window,  with  image
7316              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7317              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7318              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7319
7320       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7321              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7322
7323       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7324              cropped  to  the  maximum value (no overflow). This operation is
7325              independent of the matte channels.
7326
7327       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7328              zero.  The  matte channel is ignored (set to opaque, full cover‐
7329              age).
7330
7331       add     The result of image +  image  window,  with  overflow  wrapping
7332              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7333
7334       subtract
7335                The  result  of  image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7336              around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and  subtract  operators  can  be
7337              used to perform reversible transformations.
7338
7339       difference
7340                The  result  of  abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7341              comparing two very similar images.
7342
7343       multiply
7344               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7345              ation of drop-shadows.
7346
7347       bumpmap
7348               The result of image window shaded by window.
7349
7350       replace
7351              The  resulting  image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7352              the matte information is ignored.
7353
7354              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7355              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7356              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7357              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7358              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7359              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7360              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7361              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7362              a matte channel.
7363
7364              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7365              colormapped  X  server  visuals  (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7366              GrayScale,  PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior   may
7367              require  a  TrueColor  or  DirectColor visual or a Standard Col‐
7368              ormap.
7369
7370              Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default  operator
7371              is  replace.   However,  you must choose a location to composite
7372              your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button  before
7373              releasing  and  an  outline of the image will appear to help you
7374              identify your location.
7375
7376              The actual colors of the pasted image  is  saved.  However,  the
7377              color  that  appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7378              ple, on a monochrome screen image window will  appear  black  or
7379              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7380              image is saved to a file it is written with the correct  colors.
7381              To  assure  the correct colors are saved in the final image, any
7382              PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a  Pseu‐
7383              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7384

IMAGE CROPPING

7386       To  begin,  press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from the Command
7387       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7388
7389       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7390       window.  You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget has
7391       these options:
7392
7393           Help
7394           Dismiss
7395
7396
7397       To define a cropping region, press button  1  and  drag.  The  cropping
7398       region  is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts
7399       as it follows the pointer. Once you are  satisfied  with  the  cropping
7400       region,  release  the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify
7401       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7402
7403           Crop
7404           Help
7405           Dismiss
7406
7407
7408       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of  the  cropping
7409       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7410       to commit your cropping region. To exit  without  cropping  the  image,
7411       press Dismiss.
7412

IMAGE CHOPPING

7414       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7415       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7416       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7417
7418       You  are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In Chop
7419       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7420
7421           Direction
7422
7423           horizontal
7424           vertical
7425
7426           Help
7427           Dismiss
7428
7429
7430       If the you choose the horizontal direction (this is the  default),  the
7431       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7432       is removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two  vertical
7433       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7434
7435       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7436       hold any button. Next, move the pointer  to  another  location  in  the
7437       image.   As  you  move a line will connect the initial location and the
7438       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7439       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7440
7441       To  cancel  the  image  chopping, move the pointer back to the starting
7442       point of the line and release the button.
7443

IMAGE ROTATION

7445       Press the / key to rotate the image 90  degrees  or  \  to  rotate  -90
7446       degrees.   To  interactively  choose  the  degree  of  rotation, choose
7447       Rotate...  of the Transform submenu from the Command Widget.   Alterna‐
7448       tively, press * in the image window.
7449
7450       A  small  horizontal  line is drawn next to the pointer. You are now in
7451       rotate mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss. In  rotate  mode,  the
7452       Command widget has these options:
7453
7454           Pixel Color
7455
7456           black
7457           blue
7458           cyan
7459           green
7460           gray
7461           red
7462           magenta
7463           yellow
7464           white
7465           Browser...
7466
7467           Direction
7468
7469           horizontal
7470           vertical
7471
7472           Help
7473           Dismiss
7474
7475
7476       Choose  a  background  color  from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7477       background colors can be specified with  the  color  browser.  You  can
7478       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7479
7480       If  you  choose  the  color  browser and press Grab, you can select the
7481       background color by moving the pointer to  the  desired  color  on  the
7482       screen and press any button.
7483
7484       Choose  a  point  in  the  image window and press this button and hold.
7485       Next, move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move  a
7486       line  connects  the  initial location and the pointer. When you release
7487       the button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope  of
7488       the  line  you  just  drew.  The slope is relative to the direction you
7489       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7490
7491       To cancel the image rotation, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7492       point of the line and release the button.
7493

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7495       An  image is annotated interactively. There is no command line argument
7496       to annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit  sub-
7497       menu  from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image win‐
7498       dow.
7499
7500       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7501       window.  You  are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7502       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7503
7504
7505       Font Name
7506
7507
7508       fixed
7509
7510       variable
7511
7512       5x8
7513
7514       6x10
7515
7516       7x13bold
7517
7518       8x13bold
7519
7520       9x15bold
7521
7522       10x20
7523
7524       12x24
7525
7526       Browser...
7527
7528
7529       Font Color
7530
7531
7532       black
7533
7534       blue
7535
7536       cyan
7537
7538       green
7539
7540       gray
7541
7542       red
7543
7544       magenta
7545
7546       yellow
7547
7548       white
7549
7550       transparent
7551
7552       Browser...
7553
7554
7555       Box Color
7556
7557
7558       black
7559
7560       blue
7561
7562       cyan
7563
7564       green
7565
7566       gray
7567
7568       red
7569
7570       magenta
7571
7572       yellow
7573
7574       white
7575
7576       transparent
7577
7578       Browser...
7579
7580
7581       Rotate Text
7582
7583
7584       -90
7585
7586       -45
7587
7588       -30
7589
7590       0
7591
7592       30
7593
7594       45
7595
7596       90
7597
7598       180
7599
7600       Dialog...
7601
7602
7603       Help
7604
7605       Dismiss
7606
7607
7608       Choose a font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional  font  names
7609       can  be  specified with the font browser. You can change the menu names
7610       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7611
7612       Choose a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font  col‐
7613       ors  can  be  specified with the color browser. You can change the menu
7614       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7615
7616       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7617       color  by  moving  the  pointer  to the desired color on the screen and
7618       press any button.
7619
7620       If you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu  and
7621       select  an  angle.  Typically  you will only want to rotate one line of
7622       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7623       end up overwriting each other.
7624
7625       Choosing  a  font  and its color is optional. The default font is fixed
7626       and the default color is black. However, you must choose a location  to
7627       begin  entering  text  and press a button. An underscore character will
7628       appear at the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to  a  pencil
7629       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7630
7631       In  text  mode, any key presses will display the character at the loca‐
7632       tion of the underscore and advance the underscore  cursor.  Enter  your
7633       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7634       correct errors press BACK SPACE. To delete  an  entire  line  of  text,
7635       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7636       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7637
7638       The actual color you request for the font is saved in the  image.  How‐
7639       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7640       example, on a monochrome screen the text will  appear  black  or  white
7641       even  if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the image
7642       saved to a file with -write is written with red  lettering.  To  assure
7643       the  correct  color  text  in the final image, any PseudoClass image is
7644       promoted to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image  to
7645       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7646

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7648       An  image  composite is created interactively. There is no command line
7649       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7650       Edit  from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image win‐
7651       dow.
7652
7653       First a popup window is displayed requesting  you  to  enter  an  image
7654       name.   Press  Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel if you
7655       choose not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move  the
7656       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7657
7658       If  the  Composite  image  does not have any matte information, you are
7659       informed and the file browser is displayed again. Enter the name  of  a
7660       mask  image.  The image is typically grayscale and the same size as the
7661       composite image. If the image is not  grayscale,  it  is  converted  to
7662       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7663
7664       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7665       window. You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press  Dis‐
7666       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7667
7668
7669       Operators
7670
7671
7672       over
7673
7674       in
7675
7676       out
7677
7678       atop
7679
7680       xor
7681
7682       plus
7683
7684       minus
7685
7686       add
7687
7688       subtract
7689
7690       difference
7691
7692       bumpmap
7693
7694       replace
7695
7696
7697       Blend
7698
7699       Displace
7700
7701       Help
7702
7703       Dismiss
7704
7705
7706       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7707       widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image  window  is
7708       the  image  currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7709       obtained
7710
7711       over    The result is the union of the two  image  shapes,  with  image
7712              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7713
7714       in       The  result  is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7715              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7716
7717       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7718              out.
7719
7720       atop     The  result  is  the  same  shape  as image window, with image
7721              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7722              differs  from  over  because  the portion of image outside image
7723              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7724
7725       xor     The result is the image data from both image and  image  window
7726              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7727
7728       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7729              cropped to 255 (no overflow). This operation is  independent  of
7730              the matte channels.
7731
7732       minus    The  result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7733              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7734
7735       add     The result of image +  image  window,  with  overflow  wrapping
7736              around (mod 256).
7737
7738       subtract
7739                The  result  of  image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7740              around (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used  to
7741              perform reversible transformations.
7742
7743       difference
7744                The  result  of  abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7745              comparing two very similar images.
7746
7747       bumpmap
7748               The result of image window shaded by window.
7749
7750       replace
7751               The resulting image is image window replaced with image.   Here
7752              the matte information is ignored.
7753
7754              The  image  compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7755              image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines  a
7756              mask  which  represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7757              This is the case when matte is 255 (full  coverage)  for  pixels
7758              inside  the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7759              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7760              ized  with  0  for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7761              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7762              a matte channel.
7763
7764              If  you  choose blend, the composite operator becomes over.  The
7765              image matte channel percent transparency is initialized to  fac‐
7766              tor.   The  image  window  is initialized to (100-factor). Where
7767              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7768
7769              Displace shifts the image pixels as defined  by  a  displacement
7770              map.   With  this  option,  image is used as a displacement map.
7771              Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum  positive  dis‐
7772              placement.  White  is a maximum negative displacement and middle
7773              gray is neutral. The displacement is  scaled  to  determine  the
7774              pixel  shift.  By  default, the displacement applies in both the
7775              horizontal and vertical  directions.  However,  if  you  specify
7776              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7777              cal Y displacement.
7778
7779              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7780              colormapped  X  server  visuals (e.g.  StaticColor, StaticColor,
7781              GrayScale,  PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior   may
7782              require  a  TrueColor  or  DirectColor visual or a Standard Col‐
7783              ormap.
7784
7785              Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default  operator
7786              is  replace.   However,  you must choose a location to composite
7787              your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button  before
7788              releasing  and  an  outline of the image will appear to help you
7789              identify your location.
7790
7791              The actual colors of the composite image is saved. However,  the
7792              color  that  appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7793              ple, on a monochrome screen Image window will  appear  black  or
7794              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7795              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7796              ors.  To assure the correct colors are saved in the final image,
7797              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7798              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7799

COLOR EDITING

7801       Changing  the  the color of a set of pixels is performed interactively.
7802       There is no command line argument to edit a  pixel.  To  begin,  choose
7803       Color  from  the  Image  Edit  submenu of the Command widget.  Alterna‐
7804       tively, press c in the image window.
7805
7806       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7807       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7808       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7809
7810
7811       Method
7812
7813
7814       point
7815
7816       replace
7817
7818       floodfill
7819
7820       reset
7821
7822
7823       Pixel Color
7824
7825
7826       black
7827
7828       blue
7829
7830       cyan
7831
7832       green
7833
7834       gray
7835
7836       red
7837
7838       magenta
7839
7840       yellow
7841
7842       white
7843
7844       Browser...
7845
7846
7847       Border Color
7848
7849
7850       black
7851
7852       blue
7853
7854       cyan
7855
7856       green
7857
7858       gray
7859
7860       red
7861
7862       magenta
7863
7864       yellow
7865
7866       white
7867
7868       Browser...
7869
7870
7871       Fuzz
7872
7873
7874       0
7875
7876       2
7877
7878       4
7879
7880       8
7881
7882       16
7883           Dialog...
7884
7885
7886       Undo
7887
7888       Help
7889
7890       Dismiss
7891
7892
7893       Choose a color editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
7894       widget.  The  point method recolors any pixel selected with the pointer
7895       unless the button is released. The replace method  recolors  any  pixel
7896       that  matches  the  color  of the pixel you select with a button press.
7897       Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of  the  pixel  you
7898       select  with  a  button  press and is a neighbor.  Whereas filltoborder
7899       changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that is  not  the  border
7900       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7901
7902       Next,  choose  a  pixel color from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7903       pixel colors can be specified with the color browser.  You  can  change
7904       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7905
7906       Now  press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to change
7907       its color. Additional pixels may be  recolored  as  prescribed  by  the
7908       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7909
7910       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7911       pointer within the image (refer to button  2).  Alternatively  you  can
7912       select  a  pixel  to  recolor  from within the Magnify widget. Move the
7913       pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel  with  the  cursor
7914       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7915       pixels).
7916
7917       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7918       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7919       example, on a monochrome screen the pixel will appear  black  or  white
7920       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7921       saved to a file with -write is written with red pixels. To  assure  the
7922       correct  color  text  in the final image, any PseudoClass image is pro‐
7923       moted to DirectClass To force a PseudoClass  image  to  remain  Pseudo‐
7924       Class, use -colors.
7925

MATTE EDITING

7927       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7928       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7929       resents  a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case when
7930       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7931       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7932
7933       Setting  the matte information in an image is done interactively. There
7934       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7935       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7936
7937       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7938
7939       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7940       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7941       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7942
7943
7944       Method
7945
7946
7947       point
7948
7949       replace
7950
7951       floodfill
7952
7953       reset
7954
7955
7956       Border Color
7957
7958
7959       black
7960
7961       blue
7962
7963       cyan
7964
7965       green
7966
7967       gray
7968
7969       red
7970
7971       magenta
7972
7973       yellow
7974
7975       white
7976
7977       Browser...
7978
7979
7980       Fuzz
7981
7982
7983       0
7984
7985       2
7986
7987       4
7988
7989       8
7990
7991       16
7992           Dialog...
7993
7994
7995       Matte
7996
7997       Undo
7998
7999       Help
8000
8001       Dismiss
8002
8003       Choose  a  matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
8004       widget. The point method changes the  matte  value  of  the  any  pixel
8005       selected  with  the  pointer  until the button is released. The replace
8006       method changes the matte value of any pixel that matches the  color  of
8007       the  pixel  you select with a button press. Floodfill changes the matte
8008       value of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select  with
8009       a  button  press  and  is a neighbor. Whereas filltoborder recolors any
8010       neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes  the
8011       entire  image  to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value and a
8012       dialog appears requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between  0  and
8013       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
8014       pixels.  Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image  win‐
8015       dow  to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of addi‐
8016       tional pixels by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value  is  first
8017       added  then  subtracted  from  the  red,  green, and blue of the target
8018       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
8019       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
8020       pointer within the image (refer to button  2).  Alternatively  you  can
8021       select  a  pixel to change the matte value from within the Magnify wid‐
8022       get.  Move the pointer to the Magnify widget  and  position  the  pixel
8023       with  the  cursor  control  keys. Finally, press a button to change the
8024       matte value of the selected pixel (or pixels).   Matte  information  is
8025       only  valid in a DirectClass image. Therefore, any PseudoClass image is
8026       promoted to DirectClass. Note that matte information for PseudoClass is
8027       not  retained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, Stat‐
8028       icColor, GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save your image
8029       to  a file (refer to Write). Correct matte editing behavior may require
8030       a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8031

IMAGE DRAWING

8033       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8034       to  draw  on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image Edit sub-menu
8035       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8036
8037       The cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode.  To
8038       exit  immediately,  press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command widget has
8039       these options:
8040
8041
8042       Primitive
8043
8044
8045       point
8046
8047       line
8048
8049       rectangle
8050
8051       fill rectangle
8052
8053       circle
8054
8055       fill circle
8056
8057       ellipse
8058
8059       fill ellipse
8060
8061       polygon
8062
8063       fill polygon
8064
8065
8066       Color
8067
8068
8069       black
8070
8071       blue
8072
8073       cyan
8074
8075       green
8076
8077       gray
8078
8079       red
8080
8081       magenta
8082
8083       yellow
8084
8085       white
8086
8087       transparent
8088
8089       Browser...
8090
8091
8092       Stipple
8093
8094
8095       Brick
8096
8097       Diagonal
8098
8099       Scales
8100
8101       Vertical
8102
8103       Wavy
8104
8105       Translucent
8106
8107       Opaque
8108
8109       Open...
8110
8111
8112       Width
8113
8114
8115       1
8116
8117       2
8118
8119       4
8120
8121       8
8122
8123       16
8124           Dialog...
8125
8126
8127       Undo
8128
8129       Help
8130
8131       Dismiss
8132
8133       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8134
8135       Next, choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can  be
8136       specified  with  the  color  browser. You can change the menu colors by
8137       setting the X  resources  pen1  through  pen9.  The  transparent  color
8138       updates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8139
8140       If  you  choose  the  color  browser and press Grab, you can select the
8141       primitive color by moving the pointer  to  the  desired  color  on  the
8142       screen  and  press  any button. The transparent color updates the image
8143       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8144
8145       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8146       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8147       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8148
8149       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8150       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8151
8152       Choose  a  point in the image window and press button 1 and hold. Next,
8153       move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a  line
8154       connects  the  initial  location  and the pointer. When you release the
8155       button, the image is updated with the  primitive  you  just  drew.  For
8156       polygons,  the  image  is updated when you press and release the button
8157       without moving the pointer.
8158
8159       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8160       the line and release the button.
8161

REGION OF INTEREST

8163       To  begin,  press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel Transform sub-
8164       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8165       dow.
8166
8167       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
8168       window. You are now in region of interest mode. In region  of  interest
8169       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8170
8171
8172       Help
8173
8174       Dismiss
8175
8176
8177       To  define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region of
8178       interest is defined by a highlighted rectangle  that  expands  or  con‐
8179       tracts  as  it  follows  the  pointer.  Once you are satisfied with the
8180       region of interest, release the button. You are now in apply  mode.  In
8181       apply mode the Command widget has these options:
8182
8183
8184       File
8185
8186
8187       Save...
8188
8189       Print...
8190
8191
8192       Edit
8193
8194
8195       Undo
8196
8197       Redo
8198
8199
8200       Transform
8201
8202
8203       Flip
8204
8205       Flop
8206
8207       Rotate Right
8208
8209       Rotate Left
8210
8211
8212       Enhance
8213
8214
8215       Hue...
8216
8217       Saturation...
8218
8219       Brightness...
8220
8221       Gamma...
8222
8223       Spiff
8224
8225       Dull
8226
8227       Equalize
8228
8229       Normalize
8230
8231       Negate
8232
8233       GRAYscale
8234
8235       Quantize...
8236
8237
8238       Effects
8239
8240
8241       Despeckle
8242
8243       Emboss
8244
8245       Reduce Noise
8246
8247       Add Noise
8248
8249       Sharpen...
8250
8251       Blur...
8252
8253       Threshold...
8254
8255       Edge Detect...
8256
8257       Spread...
8258
8259       Shade...
8260
8261       Raise...
8262
8263       Segment...
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268       F/X
8269
8270
8271       Solarize...
8272
8273       Swirl...
8274
8275       Implode...
8276
8277       Wave...
8278
8279       Oil Paint
8280
8281       Charcoal Draw...
8282
8283
8284
8285
8286       Miscellany
8287
8288
8289       Image Info
8290
8291       Zoom Image
8292
8293       Show Preview...
8294
8295       Show Histogram
8296
8297       Show Matte
8298
8299
8300       Help
8301
8302       Dismiss
8303
8304
8305       You  can  make  adjustments  to  the  region  of interest by moving the
8306       pointer to one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button,  and  drag‐
8307       ging.  Finally,  choose  an image processing technique from the Command
8308       widget. You can choose more than  one  image  processing  technique  to
8309       apply  to  an  area. Alternatively, you can move the region of interest
8310       before applying another image processing technique. To exit, press Dis‐
8311       miss.
8312

IMAGE PANNING

8314       When  an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen, dis‐
8315       play maps a small panning icon. The rectangle within the  panning  icon
8316       shows  the area that is currently displayed in the the image window. To
8317       pan about the image, press any button and drag the pointer  within  the
8318       panning  icon.   The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and the image
8319       window is updated to reflect the location of the rectangle  within  the
8320       panning  icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish to
8321       view, release the button.
8322
8323       Use the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or  right
8324       within the image window.
8325
8326       The  panning  icon  is  withdrawn if the image becomes smaller than the
8327       dimensions of the X server screen.
8328

USER PREFERENCES

8330       Preferences affect the default behavior of display(1). The  preferences
8331       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8332       playrc:
8333
8334                display image centered on a backdrop"
8335
8336
8337                    This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and  is
8338                    useful  for  hiding  other X window activity while viewing
8339                    the image. The color of the backdrop is specified  as  the
8340                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8341                confirm on program exit"
8342
8343
8344                    Ask  for a confirmation before exiting the display(1) pro‐
8345                    gram.
8346                correct image for display gamma"
8347
8348
8349                    If the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected  to
8350                    match  that  of  the  X  server  (see  the X Resource dis‐
8351                    playGamma).
8352                display warning messages"
8353
8354
8355                    Display any warning messages.
8356                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8357
8358
8359                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8360                    olution  for  spatial resolution by averaging the intensi‐
8361                    ties of several neighboring pixels.  Images  which  suffer
8362                    from   severe  contouring  when  reducing  colors  can  be
8363                    improved with this preference.
8364                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8365
8366
8367                    This option only applies when the default X server  visual
8368                    is  PseudoColor  or  GRAYScale.  Refer to -visual for more
8369                    details. By default, a shared colormap is  allocated.  The
8370                    image shares colors with other X clients.  Some image col‐
8371                    ors could be approximated, therefore your image  may  look
8372                    very  different  than intended. Otherwise the image colors
8373                    appear exactly as they are defined. However, other clients
8374                    may go technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8375                display images as an X server pixmap"
8376
8377
8378                    Images  are  maintained  as  a XImage by default. Set this
8379                    resource to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead.  This
8380                    option  is  useful if your image exceeds the dimensions of
8381                    your server screen and you intend to pan the  image.  Pan‐
8382                    ning  is  much  faster  with  Pixmaps  than with a XImage.
8383                    Pixmaps are considered a precious resource, use them  with
8384                    discretion.
8385
8386
8387
8388       GM IDENTIFY
8389
8390              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8391              image files as internally supported by  the  software.  It  will
8392              also  report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The informa‐
8393              tion displayed includes the scene number,  the  file  name,  the
8394              width  and height of the image, whether the image is colormapped
8395              or not, the number of colors in the image, the number  of  bytes
8396              in  the  image,  the  format of the image (JPEG, PNM, etc.), and
8397              finally the number of seconds in both user time and elapsed time
8398              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8399              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8400              example line output from identify follows:
8401
8402                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8403                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8404
8405
8406              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8407              comment:
8408
8409
8410                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8411                  class: PseudoClass
8412                  colors: 256
8413                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8414                  matte: False
8415                  geometry: 640x480
8416                     depth: 8
8417                  bytes: 308135
8418                  format: MIFF
8419                  comments:
8420                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8421
8422
8423              For some formats, additional format-specific  information  about
8424              the  file  will  be  written  if  the -debug coder or -debug all
8425              option is used.
8426

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8428       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8429       the  command  line  remains in effect for the set of images immediately
8430       following, until the set is terminated by the appearance of any  option
8431       or -noop.
8432
8433       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8434
8435
8436       -authenticate <string>
8437              decrypt image with this password
8438
8439       -debug <events>
8440              enable debug printout
8441
8442       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8443              add coder/decoder specific options
8444
8445       -density <width>x<height>
8446              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8447
8448       -depth <value>
8449              depth of the image
8450
8451       -format <string>
8452              output formatted image characteristics
8453
8454       -help  print usage instructions
8455
8456       -interlace <type>
8457              the type of interlacing scheme
8458
8459       -limit <type> <value>
8460              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
8461              resource limit
8462
8463       -log <string>
8464              Specify format for debug log
8465
8466       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8467
8468       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8469              chroma subsampling factors
8470
8471       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8472              width and height of the image
8473
8474       -verbose
8475              print detailed information about the image
8476
8477       -version
8478              print GraphicsMagick version string
8479
8480              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8481              above.
8482
8483

GM IMPORT

8485       Import  reads  an image from any visible window on an X server and out‐
8486       puts it as an image file. You can capture a single window,  the  entire
8487       screen,  or  any  rectangular  portion  of the screen.  Use display for
8488       redisplay, printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image  processing,
8489       etc. of the captured image.
8490
8491       The  target  window can be specified by id, name, or may be selected by
8492       clicking the mouse in the desired window. If you  press  a  button  and
8493       then  drag,  a  rectangle  will form which expands and contracts as the
8494       mouse moves. To save the portion of the screen defined by  the  rectan‐
8495       gle,  just  release  the  button. The keyboard bell is rung once at the
8496       beginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8497

EXAMPLES

8499       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8500       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8501
8502           gm import window.miff
8503
8504
8505       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8506       it in the Encapsulated PostScript format to include  in  another  docu‐
8507       ment, use:
8508
8509           gm import figure.eps
8510
8511
8512       To  capture  the  entire  X server screen in the JPEG image format in a
8513       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8514
8515           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8516
8517
8518       To capture the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the  X  server
8519       screen  in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled cor‐
8520       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8521
8522           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8523                  corner.png
8524
8525

OPTIONS

8527       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8528       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
8529       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8530
8531       Import options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resources
8532       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
8533       in your X resources file.
8534
8535       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8536
8537
8538       -bordercolor <color>
8539              the border color
8540
8541       -colors <value>
8542              preferred number of colors in the image
8543
8544       -colorspace <value>
8545              the type of colorspace
8546
8547       -comment <string>
8548              annotate an image with a comment
8549
8550       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8551              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8552
8553       -debug <events>
8554              enable debug printout
8555
8556       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8557              add coder/decoder specific options
8558
8559       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8560              display the next image after pausing
8561
8562       -density <width>x<height>
8563              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8564
8565       -depth <value>
8566              depth of the image
8567
8568       -descend
8569              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8570
8571       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8572              specifies the X server to contact
8573
8574       -dispose <method>
8575              GIF disposal method
8576
8577       -dither
8578              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8579
8580       -encoding <type>
8581              specify the text encoding
8582
8583       -endian <type>
8584              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8585
8586       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8587
8588       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8589              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8590
8591       -help  print usage instructions
8592
8593       -interlace <type>
8594              the type of interlacing scheme
8595
8596       -label <name>
8597              assign a label to an image
8598
8599       -limit <type> <value>
8600              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8601              resource limit
8602
8603       -log <string>
8604              Specify format for debug log
8605
8606       -monitor
8607              show progress indication
8608
8609       -monochrome
8610              transform the image to black and white
8611
8612       -negate
8613              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8614
8615       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8616              size and location of an image canvas
8617
8618       -pause <seconds>
8619              pause between snapshots [import]
8620
8621       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8622
8623       -pointsize <value>
8624              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8625
8626       -quality <value>
8627              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8628
8629       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8630              resize an image
8631
8632       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8633              rotate the image
8634
8635       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8636              chroma subsampling factors
8637
8638       -scene <value>
8639              set scene number
8640
8641       -screen
8642              specify the screen to capture
8643
8644       -set <attribute> <value>
8645              set an image attribute
8646
8647       +set <attribute>
8648              unset an image attribute
8649
8650       -silent
8651              operate silently
8652
8653       -snaps <value>
8654              number of screen snapshots
8655
8656       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8657              resize an image (quickly)
8658
8659       -transparent <color>
8660              make this color transparent within the image
8661
8662       -trim  trim an image
8663
8664       -verbose
8665              print detailed information about the image
8666
8667       -version
8668              print GraphicsMagick version string
8669
8670              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8671              above.
8672
8673

GM MOGRIFY

8675       Mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
8676       include  image  scaling,  image  rotation, color reduction, and others.
8677       Each transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original  image,
8678       unless  an option such as -format causes the output filename to be dif‐
8679       ferent from the input filename.
8680
8681       The graphics formats supported by mogrify are  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
8682       ick(1).
8683

EXAMPLES

8685       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8686
8687           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8688
8689
8690       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8691
8692           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8693
8694
8695       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
8696       the images are going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing  it  to  run
8697       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
8698       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8699       the  desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so its
8700       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
8701       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
8702       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8703
8704       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
8705       pixels in height, use:
8706
8707           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8708
8709

OPTIONS

8711       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8712       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
8713       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8714
8715       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8716
8717
8718       -affine <matrix>
8719              drawing transform matrix
8720
8721       -antialias
8722              remove pixel aliasing
8723
8724        -asc-cdl <spec>
8725              apply ASC CDL color transform
8726
8727       -authenticate <string>
8728              decrypt image with this password
8729
8730       -auto-orient
8731              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8732
8733       -background <color>
8734              the background color
8735
8736       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8737              pixels below the threshold become black
8738
8739       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8740              blue chromaticity primary point
8741
8742       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8743              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8744
8745       -border <width>x<height>
8746              surround the image with a border of color
8747
8748       -bordercolor <color>
8749              the border color
8750
8751       -channel <type>
8752              the type of channel
8753
8754       -charcoal <factor>
8755              simulate a charcoal drawing
8756
8757       -colorize <value>
8758              colorize the image with the pen color
8759
8760       -colors <value>
8761              preferred number of colors in the image
8762
8763       -colorspace <value>
8764              the type of colorspace
8765
8766       -comment <string>
8767              annotate an image with a comment
8768
8769       -compose <operator>
8770              the type of image composition
8771
8772       -compress <type>
8773              the type of image compression
8774
8775       -contrast
8776              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8777
8778       -convolve <kernel>
8779              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8780
8781       -create-directories
8782              create output directory if required
8783
8784       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8785              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8786
8787       -cycle <amount>
8788              displace image colormap by amount
8789
8790       -debug <events>
8791              enable debug printout
8792
8793       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8794              add coder/decoder specific options
8795
8796       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8797              display the next image after pausing
8798
8799       -density <width>x<height>
8800              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8801
8802       -depth <value>
8803              depth of the image
8804
8805       -despeckle
8806              reduce the speckles within an image
8807
8808       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8809              specifies the X server to contact
8810
8811       -dispose <method>
8812              GIF disposal method
8813
8814       -dither
8815              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8816
8817       -draw <string>
8818              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8819
8820       -edge <radius>
8821              detect edges within an image
8822
8823       -emboss <radius>
8824              emboss an image
8825
8826       -encoding <type>
8827              specify the text encoding
8828
8829       -endian <type>
8830              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8831
8832       -enhance
8833              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8834
8835       -equalize
8836              perform histogram equalization to the image
8837
8838       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8839              composite image on background color canvas image
8840
8841       -fill <color>
8842              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8843
8844       -filter <type>
8845              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8846
8847       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8848
8849       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8850
8851       -font <name>
8852              use this font when annotating the image with text
8853
8854       -format <type>
8855              the image format type
8856
8857       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8858              surround the image with an ornamental border
8859
8860       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8861              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8862
8863       -gamma <value>
8864              level of gamma correction
8865
8866       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8867              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8868
8869       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8870              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8871
8872       -gravity <type>
8873              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8874
8875       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8876              green chromaticity primary point
8877
8878       -hald-clut <clut>
8879              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8880
8881       -help  print usage instructions
8882
8883       -implode <factor>
8884              implode image pixels about the center
8885
8886       -interlace <type>
8887              the type of interlacing scheme
8888
8889       -label <name>
8890              assign a label to an image
8891
8892       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8893              perform local adaptive thresholding
8894
8895       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8896              adjust the level of image contrast
8897
8898       -limit <type> <value>
8899              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
8900              resource limit
8901
8902       -linewidth
8903              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8904
8905       -list <type>
8906              the type of list
8907
8908       -log <string>
8909              Specify format for debug log
8910
8911       -loop <iterations>
8912              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8913
8914       -magnify
8915              magnify the image
8916
8917       -map <filename>
8918              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8919
8920       -mask <filename>
8921              Specify a clipping mask
8922
8923       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8924
8925       -mattecolor <color>
8926              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8927
8928       -median <radius>
8929              apply a median filter to the image
8930
8931       -minify <factor>
8932              minify the image
8933
8934       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8935              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8936
8937       -monitor
8938              show progress indication
8939
8940       -monochrome
8941              transform the image to black and white
8942
8943       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8944              Simulate motion blur
8945
8946       -negate
8947              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8948
8949       -noise <radius|type>
8950              add or reduce noise in an image
8951
8952       -noop  NOOP (no option)
8953
8954       -normalize
8955              transform image to span the full range of color values
8956
8957       -opaque <color>
8958              change this color to the pen color within the image
8959
8960       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
8961              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
8962              channel
8963
8964       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
8965              ordered dither the image
8966
8967       -output-directory <directory>
8968              output files to directory
8969
8970       -orient <orientation>
8971              Set the image orientation attribute
8972
8973       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8974              size and location of an image canvas
8975
8976       -paint <radius>
8977              simulate an oil painting
8978
8979       -pen <color>
8980              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
8981
8982       -pointsize <value>
8983              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8984
8985       -profile <filename>
8986              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
8987
8988       -preserve-timestamp
8989              preserve the original timestamps of the file
8990
8991       -quality <value>
8992              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8993
8994       -raise <width>x<height>
8995              lighten or darken image edges
8996
8997       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
8998              random threshold the image
8999
9000       -recolor <matrix>
9001              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
9002
9003       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9004              red chromaticity primary point
9005
9006       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9007              apply options to a portion of the image
9008
9009       -render
9010              render vector operations
9011
9012       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9013              Adjust image page offsets
9014
9015       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
9016              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
9017
9018       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9019              resize an image
9020
9021       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9022              roll an image vertically or horizontally
9023
9024       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9025              rotate the image
9026
9027       -sample <geometry>
9028              scale image using pixel sampling
9029
9030       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9031              chroma subsampling factors
9032
9033       -scale <geometry>
9034              scale the image.
9035
9036       -scene <value>
9037              set scene number
9038
9039       -set <attribute> <value>
9040              set an image attribute
9041
9042       +set <attribute>
9043              unset an image attribute
9044
9045       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9046              segment an image
9047
9048       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9049              shade the image using a distant light source
9050
9051       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9052              sharpen the image
9053
9054       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9055              shave pixels from the image edges
9056
9057       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9058              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9059
9060       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9061              width and height of the image
9062
9063       -solarize <factor>
9064              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9065
9066       -spread <amount>
9067              displace image pixels by a random amount
9068
9069       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9070
9071       -stroke <color>
9072              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9073
9074       -strokewidth <value>
9075              set the stroke width
9076
9077       -swirl <degrees>
9078              swirl image pixels about the center
9079
9080       -texture <filename>
9081              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9082
9083       -threshold <value>{%}
9084              threshold the image
9085
9086       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9087              resize an image (quickly)
9088
9089       -tile <filename>
9090              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9091
9092       -transform
9093              transform the image
9094
9095       -transparent <color>
9096              make this color transparent within the image
9097
9098       -treedepth <value>
9099              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9100
9101       -trim  trim an image
9102
9103       -type <type>
9104              the image type
9105
9106       -units <type>
9107              the units of image resolution
9108
9109       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9110              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9111
9112       -verbose
9113              print detailed information about the image
9114
9115       -version
9116              print GraphicsMagick version string
9117
9118       -view <string>
9119              FlashPix viewing parameters
9120
9121       -virtual-pixel <method>
9122              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9123
9124       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9125              alter an image along a sine wave
9126
9127       -white-point <x>,<y>
9128              chromaticity white point
9129
9130       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9131              pixels above the threshold become white
9132
9133              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9134              above.
9135
9136

GM MONTAGE

9138       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9139       The  images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image
9140       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9141
9142       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9143       image  specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled to
9144       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9145       It  can  be  modified  with  the  -geometry  command line argument or X
9146       resource. See Options for more information on command  line  arguments.
9147       See  X(1)  for  more information on X resources.  Note that the maximum
9148       tile size need not be a square.
9149
9150       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9151       -background  command  line argument or X resource. The width and height
9152       of the composite image is determined by the title specified, the  maxi‐
9153       mum  tile  size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border width and
9154       height, the image border width, and the label  height.  The  number  of
9155       tiles  per  row  specifies how many images are to appear in each row of
9156       the composite image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row  and  4
9157       tiles  in  each column of the composite.  A specific value is specified
9158       with -tile. The tile border width and  height,  and  the  image  border
9159       width  defaults  to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It can be
9160       changed with the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument  or  X
9161       resource.  The  label height is determined by the font you specify with
9162       the -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify  a
9163       font,  a  font  is  chosen that allows the name of the image to fit the
9164       maximum width of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined  by  the
9165       -background  and  -fill command line argument or X resource. Note, that
9166       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9167
9168       Initially, the composite image title is placed at the  top  if  one  is
9169       specified  (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the composite
9170       image, surrounded by its border color,  with  its  name  centered  just
9171       below  it. The individual images are left-justified within the width of
9172       the tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear  on
9173       the  command  line  unless  the images have a scene keyword. If a scene
9174       number is specified in each image, then the images are tiled  onto  the
9175       composite  in  the order of their scene number. Finally, the last argu‐
9176       ment on the command line is the name assigned to the  composite  image.
9177       By  default,  the image is written in the MIFF format and can be viewed
9178       or printed with display(1).
9179
9180
9181       Note, that if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of  20  (5
9182       per  row,  4  per column), more than one composite image is created. To
9183       ensure a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number  of
9184       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9185
9186       Finally,  to  create one or more empty spaces in the sequence of tiles,
9187       use the "NULL:" image format.
9188
9189       Note, a composite MIFF image displayed to  an  X  server  with  display
9190       behaves  differently  than other images. You can think of the composite
9191       as a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the  composite
9192       and press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9193

EXAMPLES

9195       To  create  a  montage  of  a cockatoo, a parrot, and a hummingbird and
9196       write it to a file called birds, use:
9197
9198           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9199                   birds.miff
9200
9201
9202       To tile several bird images so that they are  at  most  256  pixels  in
9203       width  and  192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border, and sepa‐
9204       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9205
9206           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9207                   birds.* montage.miff
9208
9209
9210       To create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and  surrounded
9211       by a border of black, use:
9212
9213           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9214                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9215
9216
9217       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9218
9219           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9220
9221
9222       To  join  several  GIF  images together without any extraneous graphics
9223       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9224
9225           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9226                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9227
9228

OPTIONS

9230       Any option you specify on the command line remains in  effect  for  the
9231       group  of  images  following  it,  until the group is terminated by the
9232       appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to make a  montage  of
9233       three  images,  the  first with 32 colors, the second with an unlimited
9234       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9235
9236
9237           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9238                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9239
9240
9241       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9242
9243
9244       -adjoin
9245              join images into a single multi-image file
9246
9247       -affine <matrix>
9248              drawing transform matrix
9249
9250       -authenticate <string>
9251              decrypt image with this password
9252
9253       -background <color>
9254              the background color
9255
9256       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9257              blue chromaticity primary point
9258
9259       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9260              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9261
9262       -bordercolor <color>
9263              the border color
9264
9265       -borderwidth <geometry>
9266              the border width
9267
9268       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9269              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9270
9271       -colors <value>
9272              preferred number of colors in the image
9273
9274       -colorspace <value>
9275              the type of colorspace
9276
9277       -comment <string>
9278              annotate an image with a comment
9279
9280       -compose <operator>
9281              the type of image composition
9282
9283       -compress <type>
9284              the type of image compression
9285
9286       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9287              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9288
9289       -debug <events>
9290              enable debug printout
9291
9292       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9293              add coder/decoder specific options
9294
9295       -density <width>x<height>
9296              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9297
9298       -depth <value>
9299              depth of the image
9300
9301       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9302              specifies the X server to contact
9303
9304       -dispose <method>
9305              GIF disposal method
9306
9307       -dither
9308              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9309
9310       -draw <string>
9311              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9312
9313       -encoding <type>
9314              specify the text encoding
9315
9316       -endian <type>
9317              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9318
9319       -fill <color>
9320              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9321
9322       -filter <type>
9323              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9324
9325       -font <name>
9326              use this font when annotating the image with text
9327
9328       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9329              surround the image with an ornamental border
9330
9331       -gamma <value>
9332              level of gamma correction
9333
9334       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9335              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9336
9337       -gravity <type>
9338              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9339
9340       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9341              green chromaticity primary point
9342
9343       -help  print usage instructions
9344
9345       -interlace <type>
9346              the type of interlacing scheme
9347
9348       -label <name>
9349              assign a label to an image
9350
9351       -limit <type> <value>
9352              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
9353              resource limit
9354
9355       -log <string>
9356              Specify format for debug log
9357
9358       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9359
9360       -mattecolor <color>
9361              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9362
9363       -mode <value>
9364              mode of operation
9365
9366       -monitor
9367              show progress indication
9368
9369       -monochrome
9370              transform the image to black and white
9371
9372       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9373
9374       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9375              size and location of an image canvas
9376
9377       -pen <color>
9378              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9379
9380       -pointsize <value>
9381              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9382
9383       -quality <value>
9384              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9385
9386       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9387              red chromaticity primary point
9388
9389       -render
9390              render vector operations
9391
9392       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9393              Adjust image page offsets
9394
9395       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9396              resize an image
9397
9398       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9399              rotate the image
9400
9401       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9402              chroma subsampling factors
9403
9404       -scenes <value-value>
9405              range of image scene numbers to read
9406
9407       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9408              shadow the montage
9409
9410       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9411              sharpen the image
9412
9413       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9414              width and height of the image
9415
9416       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9417
9418       -stroke <color>
9419              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9420
9421       -strokewidth <value>
9422              set the stroke width
9423
9424       -texture <filename>
9425              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9426
9427       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9428              resize an image (quickly)
9429
9430       -tile <geometry>
9431              layout of images [montage]
9432
9433       -title <string>
9434              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9435
9436       -transform
9437              transform the image
9438
9439       -transparent <color>
9440              make this color transparent within the image
9441
9442       -treedepth <value>
9443              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9444
9445       -trim  trim an image
9446
9447       -type <type>
9448              the image type
9449
9450       -verbose
9451              print detailed information about the image
9452
9453       -version
9454              print GraphicsMagick version string
9455
9456       -white-point <x>,<y>
9457              chromaticity white point
9458
9459              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9460              above.
9461
9462

X RESOURCES

9464       Montage options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
9465       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
9466       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9467
9468       All montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition,  mon‐
9469       tage uses the following X resources:
9470
9471       background (class Background)
9472              background color
9473
9474              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9475              background.  The default is #ccc.
9476
9477       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9478              border color
9479
9480              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9481              border. The default is #ccc.
9482
9483       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9484              border width
9485
9486              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9487              default is 2.
9488
9489       font (class Font)
9490              font to use
9491
9492              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when  displaying
9493              text  within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed, or
9494              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9495
9496       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9497              color of the frame
9498
9499              Specify the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved  by
9500              using  highlight  and shadow colors derived from this color. The
9501              default value is #697B8F.
9502
9503       pen (class Pen)
9504              text color
9505
9506              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9507              ite image.  The default is black.
9508
9509       title (class Title)
9510              composite image title
9511
9512              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9513              composite image. The default is not to place a title at the  top
9514              of the composite image.
9515

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9518       time  executes  an  arbitrary  gm  utility  command  (e.g. convert) and
9519       reports the user and elapsed time.  This provides way to  measure  com‐
9520       mand execution times similar to the Unix ´time' command but in a porta‐
9521       ble and consistent way.
9522

EXAMPLES

9524       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9525
9526       % gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm convert  input.ppm
9527       -gaussian  0x2  output.ppm     22.60s user 0.00s system 2354% cpu 0.960
9528       total
9529
9530       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9531
9532           user - the total user time consumed.
9533           system - the total system time consumed.
9534           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9535
9536

OPTIONS

9538       The time command reqires no options other than the gm command  to  exe‐
9539       cute.
9540

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9543       version  displays  the  software  release version, build quantum (pixel
9544       sample) depth, web site URL, copyright notice,  enabled  features  sup‐
9545       port,  configuration  parameters, and final build options used to build
9546       the software.  The available information depends on  how  the  software
9547       was configured and the host system.
9548

EXAMPLES

9550       To display the version information:
9551
9552         GraphicsMagick 1.3.27a 2017-12-11 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9553         Copyright (C) 2002-2017 GraphicsMagick Group.
9554         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9555         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9556         Feature Support:
9557           Native Thread Safe       yes
9558           Large Files (> 32 bit)   yes
9559           Large Memory (> 32 bit)  yes
9560           BZIP                     yes
9561           DPS                      no
9562           FlashPix                 no
9563           FreeType                 yes
9564           Ghostscript (Library)    no
9565           JBIG                     yes
9566           JPEG-2000                yes
9567           JPEG                     yes
9568           Little CMS               yes
9569           Loadable Modules         no
9570           OpenMP                   yes (201307)
9571           PNG                      yes
9572           TIFF                     yes
9573           TRIO                     no
9574           UMEM                     no
9575           WebP                     yes
9576           WMF                      yes
9577           X11                      yes
9578           XML                      yes
9579           ZLIB                     yes
9580         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9581         Configured using the command:
9582           ./configure  ...
9583         Final Build Parameters:
9584           CC       = ...
9585           CFLAGS   = ...
9586           CPPFLAGS = ...
9587           CXX      = ...
9588           CXXFLAGS = ...
9589           LDFLAGS  = ...
9590           LIBS     = ...
9591
9592

OPTIONS

9594       The version command does not currently support any options.
9595
9596
9597
9598GraphicsMagick                    2018/10/14                             gm(1)
Impressum